Transcripts of Kailasa Chandra’s Review of and Commentary on Eleven Naked Emperors

Kailasa Chandra reviews Eleven Naked Emperors.

Chapters 1 and 2. (July 1, 2024)

Chapter 3. (August 1, 2024)

Chapter 4. (September 1, 2024)

Chapter 5. (October 1, 2024)

Chapter 6. (November 1, 2024)

Chapter 7. (December 1, 2024)

Chapter 8. (January 1, 2025)

Chapter 9. (February 1, 2025)

Chapter 10. (March 1, 2025)

Chapter 11. (April 1, 2025)

Chapter 12. (May 1, 2025)

Chapter 13. (June 1, 2025)

Podcast transcription (July 1, 2024): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapters One and Two by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapters One and Two of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

Concerning the history of the Western Hare Kṛṣṇa movement, in order to put the puzzle together, some basic components and building blocks must be secured and assimilated from the outset. There is only one accurate narrative in connection to Śrīla Prabhupāda’s Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. As opposed to this, there are numerous false narratives, and you need to confront and overcome all of them.

They are all illusory, and one of the qualities of such māyikā narratives is kñaro-bhāvaḥ: Endlessly mutable.1 If there was the right narrative and only one wrong one, that would make the task much easier, but such is not the case. There are at least a dozen false narratives floating in the ether and on the astral plane as to what went down and why in relation to the Western branch of Kṛṣṇa consciousness, which Prabhupāda attempted to establish in the Sixties and the Seventies.

The duty of The Vaishnava Foundation is to give you the facts and the truth. This organization takes that duty seriously. That duty entails presenting to you the accurate narrative of Prabhupāda’s Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. This will butt up against all of those false narratives—and false historical interpretations—which misdirect you into their own variety māyikā explanations and mindsets. You need to transcend all of that. With the help of The Vaishnava Foundation, you will be able to do so . . . as long as you are very determined to do it.

These statements should not be misinterpreted to mean that we claim a monopoly on anything. Only the pure devotee—either completely self-realized or, higher than that, fully God-realized—can legitimately claim a monopoly on pure bhakti. The historical narrative of what went down in the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement must have bhakti as one of its components, and acintyā is connected to that divine component . . . at least, to some extent. We make no attempt to overcome that which falls into the category of acintyā. However please note, not everything connected to the historical record is acintyā. Actually, most of it is not inconceivable.

If we want actual facts and truth, and we should insist upon securing them. To a significant extent, the V.F. has done so, and now you can share in that attainment. We have accepted help from many sources in doing so, and one of those sources is what this series is all about. With facts, we can put together the pieces of the puzzle in a way which is not even slightly contradictory and/or shot through with lacunae. The myriad false narratives are loaded with misinterpretation, half truths, contradiction, bias, and endlessly mutable rationalizations that do not hold up. Shine a light on them. The Vaishnava Foundation gives you that light.

Let us proceed to the marma of this seva. Your host speaker has paid the price over the many years (read, decades) in which he has fought “ISKCON,” Neo-Mutt, and Rittvik. Making enemies in that endeavor is baked into the cake and unavoidable. The Vaishnava Foundation has utilized facts, historical references, and knowledge (of various application from numerous sources) in order to expose māyikā influences which today cover the overwhelming majority of devotees. We do not demand that those sources be perfect nor do we demand that those sources even be overtly favorable to His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda.

That is controversial, obviously, but that does not make our approach wrong. Most people are not serious or sincere enough to meet the requisite minimum in making the necessary concerted effort to put the pieces of the puzzle together in the right way. However, we are not like that. We are very serious and sincere in doing this.

We took on this seva and confronted a strong inimical current by doing so. We swam against it with knowledge on our side. We were also often lucky over the years, and part of that luck was provided to us in the form of a book produced by Henry Doktorski.

Its title is Eleven Naked Emperors (hereinafter, referred to by its acronym of E.N.E.). Although it has māyā in it, the work is nevertheless valuable and should be appreciated as such. This multi-part series recognizes and records its value, along with its (the series) exposing some of the māyikā influences which the book was unable to overcome.

This multi-part series is called a review; it is not called a critique. If the māyikā elements in E.N.E. were anywhere near a quarter of its content, we would either not have undertaken this series or, if we had, it would have been labeled a critique. He has given us valuable information and historical facts. As such, this presentation, this multi-part series, does not represent a critique; it is mostly a favorable review.

Is Doktorski a great writer? Possibly. However, even if you disagree with that, he is certainly a very good writer. He is extremely well-organized in his chapter selection in E.N.E. It is loaded with references to establish his points, and such meticulous, painstaking effort puts him in a special category in and of itself. The book has 931 Endnotes! That kind of meticulous attention to detail is outstanding.

Yet, that is not the crown jewel of his effort here. That accolade belongs to the tremendous research he put into the creating the work. Frankly, he is the best researcher of any person or devotee connected—either favorably or unfavorably—to Prabhupāda’s Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. That is my opinion. I can only think of one other man who compares to him.2 He is fantastic as a researcher. Still, he is second best when compared to Doktorski relative to painstaking, organizational gum shoe detective work.

Real research produces real results, which dovetail well in the matter of putting the pieces of a complex puzzle together in a cohesive, consistent, and, most importantly, right way . . . right way as in THE right way . . . although Doktorski falls short of that. The Vaishnava Foundation does not fall short in this connection and is grateful to E.N.E.’s research in assisting us. It is possible that someone up the road may surpass him, but at this point, nobody has done so. The information he has dug up from multifarious sources—including remote sources—deserves heaps of praise. My review will praise him in every chapter reviewed.

There are sixteen chapters to E.N.E.. We shall only review the first fifteen. The last chapter is anything but outstanding, and we intentionally choose to avoid it. Some may opine that it scars the work. Doktorski was never in an environment which favored devotion to Śrīla Prabhupāda. The so-called “Prabhupāda Palace of Gold,” although ostensibly a work of devotion to His Divine Grace, was actually just the opposite. There are reasons why that was so, but we have no need to go down the rabbit hole.

We urge all readers of E.N.E. to overlook the flaws of the sixteenth chapter and not to take any of those expressed viewpoints too seriously. If the book ended with Chapter Fifteen, that would have been better. We are not going to allow one chapter to taint all that the other fourteen or fifteen chapters give to us in terms of value, knowledge, facts, historical references, and delineation of the movement’s polarities. These binaries deeply and irreversibly afflict whatever is left of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement as an international organization, which is very little indeed.

Each chapter (reviewed in chronological order) will have some of its entries deconstructed and analyzed according to your host speaker’s discretion. I shall bring out the references in them that I find most valuable. I shall then make a commentary on what I choose to cull out. Sometimes, my explanation will tie into others ones in that chapter. Sometimes, it will tie into what I cull out in other chapters. Often, my specific commentary (and the reference it analyzes) will stand alone.

I shall certainly not analyze and deconstruct anything and everything, and such should not be expected of me. At the end of each chapter, I shall give it a grade. The topmost grade any chapter will receive will be an A-plus. The lowest grade any of the fifteen chapters will receive will be a C-minus. At the end of the presentation (and that will not be anywhere near today’s first part of this series, obviously), I shall tally up all of the grades and divide by fifteen. Thus, I shall come up with my cumulative grade for the entire work (sans the sixteenth chapter).

The first edition of E.N.E. was published on the last day of January, 2020. The version of E.N.E. that I am consulting is the fifteenth edition of the book, which was revised in the summer of 2023. I am consulting the Kindle version, which relates to reference page numbers. The book is self-published as far as that goes, although in due course, some major publisher may pick it up, promote it, and distribute it. Let us see. The book contains a long and favorable Foreword from Professor Edwin Bryant, an expert on Hinduism at Rutgers University.

Each chapter begins with what the author considers to be an important quote. When I agree that it is, I shall mention it. When I do, I comment on his use of that aphorism, slogan, trope, or bromide. I disagree with one of these however, and that will be described in due course.

Chapter One: Gauḍīya Vaishnavism Comes to the West

The zonal ācārya era (1978-1987) was a kind of Wild West in what then became of the movement, which lost its legitimacy once that massive concoction was imposed everywhere. The zonals controlled the G.B.C. both in power (and almost in numbers, as well) and via the Acārya Board. The zonals were all princes in their own principalities, known technically as zones. The book brings this out early near the beginning of Chapter One, emphasizing that Kṛṣṇa consciousness in each of those zones was nothing more than what the zonal ācārya said that it was:

“ . . . each guru was, for the most part, independent of the others; there was no all-encompassing corporate or ecclesiastical organization to oversee the movement and there were no charters or bylaws. Each guru followed the instructions of Chaitanya Mahaprabhu according to his own interpretation and the interpretation of his spiritual master.”3

To its credit, E.N.E. notes that Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar was instrumental in the break-up of the Gauḍīya Mutt just weeks after its Founder-Ācārya left physical manifestation. It is praiseworthy that the first entry relative to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar from Navadvipa was, in effect, both factual (very importantly so) and critical. That he was referenced in the first chapter of the book is important.

The encapsulated history of Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇavism and the Gauḍīya Mutt was well done, and it certainly belonged in Chapter One. That the vote to install Ānanta Vāsudeva as the replacement or Successor Ācārya for Śrīla Bhaktisiddhānta Sarasvātī was 8-5 is not mentioned, but, except for that, the concise historical analysis of the demise of Gauḍīya Mutt to asāra (useless) was first-class writing and historical fact.

“It is important to note that Bhakti Raksak Śrīdhar Maharaja (1895-1988), who was quoted above, served as a Governing Body member in 1937 and voted for the promotion of Ananta Vasudeva, which led to the initial schism in the Gauḍīya Math and, in effect, destroyed it. We mention this because B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja, as we shall see in Chapters 6 and 14, had an important part in the creation of the ISKCON zonal-acharya system.”4

“Although he had requested his Gauḍīya Math godbrothers for assistance, none helped him.”5

That this is summarized early is both appropriate and important. All the letters sent by Prabhupāda to Gauḍīya Mutt leaders must be read and understood in this context. By this, your host speaker means to say that Prabhupāda, as tri-kāla-jña,6 knew very well that he would receive no help whatsoever from his appeal. Nevertheless, he went through the motions as if he actually hoped to receive it. By doing that, he could not be criticized as a wild-card that had broken away to do his own thing, i.e., no longer concerned about his spiritual master’s organization.

If the objection is made that Prabhupāda received a damaged package from Swāmi Nārāyan of Mathura with some karatals, some incense, and a certificate stating his (Prabhupāda’s) bona fides, that cannot be considered really very consequential. As such, the author’s summary cannot be criticized on that basis. Aside from that, the above entry in E.N.E. clearly states that it was Prabhupāda’s godbrothers who provided him no assistance whatsoever. Swāmi Nārāyan was not one of Prabhupāda’s godbrothers, so the comment remains legitimate for that reason.

The chapter closes with a fitting discussion about the disciplic succession. By this, it is evident that who will succeed Prabhupāda as the next ācārya in the disciplic succession is discussed, with quotes. It is encapsulated quite effectively. Interestingly enough, a key factor concerning guru is touched upon (although not emphasized) in the first excerpt brought forth:

“I am training you to be guru. I am training you to be perfect, so that in my absence things will go on. . . Maybe by 1975, all of my disciples will be allowed to initiate and increase the numbers of the generations. That is my program.”7

Prabhupāda’s program was to make at least one of his disciples a perfectly realized person. The guru must be a very perfect man, and this Prabhupāda directly stated in the mid-Sixties even before his movement took off in terms of numbers and centers. The highest perfection is known as siddha, although it also has even higher stages. Generally, the real guru, the paramahaṁsa Vaiṣṇava, is a siddha. However, guru can begin—at least, in Vaiṣṇavism–before this stage.

Does that mean, when it does begin before siddha, that the guru is not a perfect man. Most definitely not! The guru is fixed as a brāhmin at that initial stage, which is known as madhyam-adhikārī. The madhyam is a very perfect man, but he is not a completely perfected being. The siddha is that. He is automatically the Successor when the previous perfected siddha spiritual master—in this case, Prabhupāda—departs physical manifestation. Prabhupāda did not name a Successor. He could not do so, because none of his initiated disciples were anywhere near that platform of complete realization of transcendence.

As the training excerpt directly states, they were all in the stage of being trained by him while Prabhupāda was with us. Indirectly, this indicates that none of them were even madhyam-adhikārīs when Prabhupāda’s movement entered the Seventies.

You would surmise that it would not or should not stay that way, but you would be very wrong if you bought into into such a pre-suppostion. As time went on, things got worse, not better. Prabhupāda’s hope for the men he considered to be his advanced students was not realized. On the contrary, it was a section of these very men who steered his branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness off course.

A train traveling at high speeds, when it derails, causes more damage than if it had been traveling slowly. The race to be guru and so-called Successor was engaged full bore amongst a handful of so-called advanced students, although many (if not most) of the real workers did not realize it at the time. They would all come to realize it soon enough.

You would think that Prabhupāda’s leading secretaries would be selected by him as members of his governing body commission. On the whole, that was so. Such was also the case (although it played out a bit differently) when it came to the issue of who would succeed Prabhupāda’s spiritual master, Siddhānta Sarasvātī in the mid-Thirties.

The author covered this topic well and deserves praise for doing so in this chapter. Near the chapter’s close—and Prabhupāda’s close–does he mention the G.B.C.? He does.

Interviewer: Is there anyone who is designated to succeed you as the primary teacher of the movement?
Prabhupāda: I am training some, I mean to say, advanced students so that they may very easily take up the charge. I have made them G.B.C. They are under my direct training, and I think they will be able to conduct this movement.
Interviewer: Do you expect to name one person as your Successor or have you already?
Prabhupāda: That I am not contemplating now, but there is no need of one person.8

TATTVAMASI

In terms of the time frame of his presence, this was late. Prabhupāda indicates that he was not going to select a Successor, who, by the very definition, would have to be a siddha. The madhyam is a guru in the line, certainly. However, because he can fall down (and for other reasons), he is never considered nor called a Successor in the disciplic succession.

He can link you to the sampradāya. However, although he is a perfect man fixed in the mode of goodness as a brāhmin, the Successor requires qualifications far beyond that status. Prabhupāda is not inclined to naming one person to succeed him as per the interview. In April of 1977 (as we shall soon hear and read), no one was qualified to be guru at any stage. In terms of how things played out, it is easy now to see why.

According to the Direction of Management charter which was supposed to have governed the G.B.C., the governing body commissioners were to be known as Executors. You would think that they were automatically the first in line for reaching the stage of a regular guru, which means a madhyam guru. This is eminently reasonable, although all of his students were eligible for the post if they met its qualifications.

As such, Prabhupāda informs the interviewer (who used the term Successor) that he was directly training them as direct representatives to take the charge. Notice, Prabhupāda did not use the term “Successor,” but instead used the lesser status of “taking up the charge.” No accident there, as he was not thinking that a Successor was going to emerge. As tri-kāla-jña, who already knew that one would not.

The author then closes the first chapter in an excellent way. He has covered a lot, and, although he has moved through the time stamp very expeditiously, he has also been quite thorough. In the close, he lets the reader know that Prabhupāda was changing his mind about how the movement might turn out. Free will is what it is, and it was being grievously misused by his leading secretaries in the last year that he was with us. Here’s how the author sums that up:

“Why did Bhaktivedänta Swāmi Prabhupāda change his mind about who would become his successors? Did he lose confidence in the spiritual progress of his most ‘advanced students?’ He gave an important clue when he said, ‘All my disciples are leaders, as much as they follow purely.’ Apparently he thought his senior-most disciples were not following purely.”9

Excellent reasoning. Certainly, he lost confidence in them. There is strong evidence that a coterie of them were poisoning him, what to speak of the general incompetence being shown by the whole group. At the very end, Prabhupāda is depending upon his other disciples to step up, take command, and become fixed as brāhmin-Vaiṣṇavas.

Thus, they would qualify themselves to be ordered by him to become an initiating spiritual master. As a limited dīkṣā-guru, they could carry on the line until the emergence of the next uttama-adhikārī, who would automatically emerge as the Successor. He was saying that the post of guru—either at its beginning (in which case, they are gurus from nature’s study) or at its pinnacle (when one of them became a perfected siddha), genuine guru-disciple relationships could emerge.

Prabhupāda was still hoping that his movement would go on. Nevertheless, E.N.E. hits the nail on the head in Chapter One’s final sentence when it opines that Prabhupāda thought that his senior-most disciples were not following purely. Profit, adoration, distinction, and power ambitions had entered his big guns in a big way, endowing them with demoniac tendencies.

So much for the “advanced disciples.”

Chapter One has no flaws and is constructed in a superb way. It is well organized. It gives a significant amount of knowledge and information. It features important quotes. It deserves an A-plus grade.

Prabhupāda Was Not Sent the Best of Men

Chapter Two of E.N.E. is one of its shorter ones. The chief theme is well-placed by having it inserted early in the book. The title of the chapter is: “Krishna Only Gave Me Second- and Third-Class Men.” Quotations marks were not used in the title, however, although it is obviously a quote from Prabhupāda; this is a very minor discrepancy.

The praiseworthy element most prominent in analyzing this chapter is the extensive use of outstanding and hard-hitting Prabhupāda quotes which are, for all practical purposes, self-evident. They are so as to the facts and truths (all powerful) that the author wishes to establish.

Yet, we shall only reproduce one of those. What the author attempts to establish in this chapter is that Prabhupāda’s chances of establishing a successful and lasting branch of the Caitanya tree in the West was anything but guaranteed. This was particularly the case, because his “most advanced” disciples (and E.N.E. does use quotations marks repeatedly in this regard to this term throughout—and rightly so) were probably going to muck everything up.

Allow me to also mention a side note: I myself am quoted extensively throughout E.N.E. By my rough calculation (and I am not going to put in extensive time to verify this calculation, obviously) only Prabhupāda is quoted more than myself in E.N.E. This factored into my decision to produce this multi-part series.

You can consider that an egotistical factor, but it is not so: The author has helped your host speaker’s mission by quoting and referencing me (in this particular work) as extensively as he has. As such, you could say, in part, that this multi-part series is an effort to show my appreciation to him for that seva. There is no doubt that my message has reached more devotees because of his first two books and my being quoted in them as extensively as I have been. As a reminder: E.N.E. is Doktorski’s second book.

For the record, he excerpts twenty-two e-mails that he received from me between 2014-2019. I shall be reproducing some of those as we proceed, although the first of them is not published in the book until Chapter Three. He also culled out eight excerpts from my book Beyond Institutional Gurus, Initiations, and Party Men.

In E.N.E., he included a biographical note early in the text. An excerpt from one of my prominent articles on a Vaishnava Foundation website is also brought forth. Aside from these, there is a description of who I am and what I do, along with a photo, at the end of the book; it is included along with other players in the saga in alphabetical order.

On to that most important quote from Prabhupāda that E.N.E. appropriately highlights, especially according to what the headline indicates in Chapter Two. I am on the record as to being the first devotee to point out and explain the mega-ramifications and import of this room conversation in Prabhupāda’s quarters at Bombay.

By April 22nd of Prabhupāda’s last year with us, T.K.G. was already his gatekeeper and would remain Prabhupāda’s so-called personal servant for the duration of the year. This exchange was between Prabhupāda and him, and T.K.G. showed some honesty in how he accepted what Prabhupāda stated. This transcript is available both in the Folio and E.N.E. Although E.N.E. did not present the whole of everything that is reproduced by me here, it presented most and enough of it to make the point:

Prabhupāda: You become guru, but you must be qualified first of all. Then you become.
T.K.G.: Oh, that kind of complaint was there.
Prabhupāda: Did you know that?
T.K.G.: Yeah, I heard that.
Prabhupāda: What is the use of producing some rascal guru?
T.K.G.: Well, I have studied myself and all of your disciples, and it’s clear fact that we are all conditioned souls, so we cannot be guru. Maybe one day it may be possible but not now.
Prabhupāda: Yes. I shall choose some guru. I shall say, ‘Now you become ācārya. You become authorized.’ I am waiting for that. You become all ācārya. I retire completely, but the training must be complete.
T.K.G.: The process of purification must be there.
Prabhupāda: Oh, yes, must be there. Caitanya Mahāprabhu wants that. Āmāra ājñāya guru hañā: You become guru but be qualified. Little thing, strictly follower.
T.K.G.: Not rubber stamp.
Prabhupāda: Then you’ll not be effective. You can cheat, but it will not be effective.

Less than one year later, T.K.G. and ten of his comrades wound up being glorified as uttama-adhikārīs throughout the world. They were then being proclaimed and glorified as Successors to Prabhupāda, along with opulent worship on high seats in front of open Deities.

They were glorified with pranam mantras, feet bathing, kīrtans, and all kinds of labels which were concocted imitations of Viṣṇupāda and Prabhupāda. One actually was called Viṣṇupāda. In a mere year, eleven men (who were not gurus even at the preliminary status of madhyam-adhikārīs or regular gurus at the end of April, 1977), had allegedly advanced to the highest level of spiritual power and purity.

Madhyams are advanced devotees. They are preliminarily perfect. Prabhupāda would certainly have been prepared to recognize any of his leading secretaries if he had reached the level of madhyam. If he had done so, he would be known as a regular guru. Prabhupāda called that stage: “Little thing. Simply following.” However, in April of 1977, he made it clear that no one had become even a regular guru.

His leading secretaries had all been in the movement for many years. Yet this room exchange in Bombay indicates clearly that none of them had advanced past the stage of kaniṣṭhā-adhikārī or the neophyte status. Neophytes cannot be genuine gurus, because they lack the training and the realization that is required for the post.

Prabhupāda was not going to recognize a neophyte as guru simply so that he could have disciples follow him as so-called gurus, even though they were not sufficiently trained and qualified. As he put it at the end of the conversation, “You can cheat, but it will not be effective.” Cheating is exactly what they did after he departed physical manifestation.

Appropriately and timely reproduced in E.N.E. at the beginning of the book, Prabhupāda said that he would choose some guru. He also said that the training first had to be complete and he was waiting for that. Did he choose some guru? Did he choose some gurus? He did not.

Instead, in the second week of July of his final year here, he appointed eleven rittviks. Rittviks are not dīkṣā-gurus, and, contrary to the flawed propaganda of the “ISKCON” narrative, he never said that the appointment of those rittviks would then convert them into regular gurus after their rittvik service ended. For the record, it ended when he left physical manifestation.

Remember also that Prabhupāda said he would appoint some gurus in late May after first saying the same thing earlier in Bombay during this room conversation with T.K.G. As such, he said that he would do something that he never wound up doing—at least, not officially—for the reason stated clearly here: The training was not complete. Another way of saying the same thing is that none of his leading secretaries actually took the training to heart and completed the course.

Instead they cheated in a big way, which he warned about in this room conversation. They cheated via the colossal hoax of self-appointing themselves to uttama-adhikārī. That status of attainment was never specifically indicated by Prabhupāda, which also means he did not foresee any of them reaching it during that immediate time frame.

In this excerpt from the April, 1977 Bombay room conversation, he calls for the guru to be strictly following and also directly calls that a “little thing.” One month later in Raman Reti, he reiterated this by directly stating: “Regular guru, that’s all.”

The madhyam-adhikārī, at the initial stages, is still under vidhi-bhakti regulations (regular). The uttama-adhikārī is far above and beyond being under any regulations whatsoever. When those eleven great pretenders imitated uttama-adhikārī, they went beyond the jurisdiction of their realization. In other words, they were all full-blown sahajiyās when they accepted zones of autocratic control and their undeserved and outrageous worship which accompanied all of that. It was all approved under the imprimatur of the governing body, which they controlled.

E.N.E. brought forth many quotes in the second chapter proving that Kṛṣṇa did not send Prabhupāda very qualified candidates to be trained by him and to carry out his branch of the line into perpetuity. We have only reproduced and commented upon one of those excerpts, but the book makes the point elsewhere in the chapter conclusively. There is no glaring flaw in Chapter Two.

However, it does lack the in-depth analysis of an apparent contradiction it brings forward. I consider this to have been necessary. The apparent contradiction comes into play via a few quotes (reproduced at the beginning of the chapter) wherein Prabhupāda enjoins a devotee to only accept an uttama-adhikārī as guru.

It would be tangential for your host speaker to explain the proper interpretation of this apparent contradiction here in the review. Please note, however, that I have done so in other articles, videos, and podcasts. Seek and ye shall find. I have no obligation to explain what I consider to be either major or minor discrepancies contained in E.N.E., and, on the whole, I do not do so, although I sometimes will mention them.

This discrepancy is a minor one of omission. Doktorski is not a devotee of Prabhupāda, so, on especially sticky topics, you cannot expect him to overcome such apparent contradictions. Due to his lack of devotion to His Divine Grace, he either misunderstands the explanation of the issue or does not accept it. As such, I cannot give Chapter Two the highest grade possible. Yet, that minor omission is seen by me as nothing more than a small blot. In other words, I give Chapter Two a straight A.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. To reiterate: We do not demand that the SOURCES of facts and truths about the ACTUAL NARRATIVE of what went down in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement be themselves perfect. The facts must be factual, and the truths must be true. That standard is upheld here, and the first two chapters of E.N.E. are excellent in that respect. Another way of saying the same thing is that, in these two chapters, you can gain a foothold on the real narrative and start to put the pieces of the puzzle together quite nicely.

You can slag this review if you so choose, but that will not make any such slime justified. E.N.E. is much more helpful than it is harmful. We can eliminate the lesser chaff and take advantage of all of the wheat that it offers. This first installment of our multi-part review does just that. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 Bhagavad-gita, 8.4, verse itself;

2 Nityananda prabhu;

3 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (pp. 40-41). Kindle Edition;

4 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (pp. 46-47). Kindle Edition;

5 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 48/p. 55). Kindle Edition;

6 Tri-kala-jna is one of the lesser twenty-three mystic powers that can be developed as a result of tapasya engaged via a genuine yoga system. Mostly, in terms of general applicability, it is the ability to know the future, and that is how it is applied here. Prabhupada possessed all twenty-three mystic powers, and tri-kala-jna is considered one of the five (of those twenty-three) that is of lesser importance compared to the others;

7 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 57). Kindle Edition. Direct excerpt from a letter to a leading secretary, 1-2-69;

8 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 57). Kindle Edition. Direct quote from room conversation with reporter, 6-4-76;

9 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 58). Kindle Edition.


Podcast transcription (August 1, 2024): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Three by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Three of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

Unless they are too painful, everyone remembers the crossroads moments in their lives. These were the times of decisions of impact, ones which locked in the course of the future in some specific way. To be a crossroads moment, it had to be comprehensive and major in consequence. We may regret one or more of them and, conversely, we may thank our lucky stars (there is truth to that aphorism) that we made the crucial decision we did at that momentous time. In no small part, we have had (or still have) powerful intellectual and emotional responses to these moments on the basis of how things played out after that decision. The Sanskrit for this principle is phalena-paricīyate: Judge by the results.

In relation to any specific crossroads moment, if we analyze our decision in relation to it in an unbiased way, in the vast majority of cases, we shall come to this conclusion: The more that critical thinking was integral to our decision during that moment in our lives, the better the decision was. In other words, with a few exceptions, we did not just luck into a good or a bad result at a crossroads moment.

Applying critical thinking—which actually means intelligence—to a crossroads situation could only have helped. The more, the better. As such, there are three factors here: The crossroads moment, our intelligence in relation to it, and the mind’s decision after undergoing the stages of thinking, feeling, and willing in relation to it.

Critical thinking, from the Vedic perspective, is a kind of misnomer. It is the mind which thinks. Superior to the mind is the intelligence, which discriminates and deliberates. According to the teachings of His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedānta Swāmi Prabhupāda, intelligence is defined as fine discrimination, in activity, with good memory. Thinking is from a different, lower level of the mental quantum. However, we shall continue to use the terminology of critical thinking in this presentation, although you should be aware of its context, viz., it is actually intelligence; it is not actually the thinking facet of the astral body.

When intelligence is engaged in trying to serve in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, that is called buddhi-yoga. It begins with the working principles of buddhi-yoga and advances from there. As just mentioned, from the Vedic perspective, intelligence is not merely rumination. On the contrary, it is fine discrimination IN ACTIVITY. Deliberation in Kṛṣṇa consciousness is integral to seva yoga, a synonym for buddhi-yoga.

Let us again consider and return to those crossroads moments. They are most important to us, granted, but these are not at all limited to human beings. There are crossroads moments for communities. There are crossroads moments for corporations. There are crossroads moments for nation-states. There are crossroads moments for organized religions. We could easily fill a multi-part series discussing all of this in the contexts of these categories (along with human crossroads moments), but that would be both diversionary and tangential.

Instead, in this month’s presentation, we are going to consider but one crossroads moment. It was in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. It was ultra-momentous. It remains controversial, although it should not be so. Its purport and import is so great that it would not be wrong to consider it merely very important. It is on a scale all of its own.

You may say that these judgments are nothing more than your host speaker’s opinion or prejudice, but that would be wrong on your part. These judgments about it are not subjective; they are objective. Since the Spring of 1978, all hell has broken loose in what only superficially appears to be Prabhupāda’s bhakti yoga cult, corporately known by its acronym of ISKCON. That is a very long story in and of itself. Integral to it, however, is an event which took place in late May of 1977, a little less than one year earlier. The issue here is measured in scale in terms of importance.

A bit of clarification is herein best inserted.

Prabhupāda dictated to his leading secretaries (who then transcribed them onto written pages via a typewriter) over 6,300 letters. He personally signed them all. These letters were to his disciples, well-wishers, interested people, corporate entities, so forth and so on. There was a gradation of importance to them. In other words, although opinion (to some extent) could differ amongst his disciples, you could categorize, in terms of importance and revelation, the top ten letters.

For example, while visiting Tirupati, India in late 1974, Prabhupāda dictated a letter. The date was April 28th of that year, and that letter was to Rūpānuga, one of his leading secretaries and prominent governing body commissioners. Except for the Neo-Mutt faction, virtually every Prabhupāda disciple, initiated or otherwise, would agree that this important and historically detailed letter would qualify for the top ten amongst all of those thousands sent out by snail mail.

Similarly, there would be the top ten Prabhupāda initiation ceremonies, where he either directly conducted it or was present for it from his Vyāsāsana. This would be measured mostly in terms of how prominent it was, how many of his devotees attended it, how many were initiated, whether something new was revealed during it, etc. The first initiation in the summer of 1966 would certainly qualify for the top ten. The mass initiation ceremony at the Moundsville compound in the late summer of 1972 would also probably make that list.

Then, there would be the temple dedications which Prabhupāda attended. This would include laying the cornerstone as well as inaugurating the opening. There would be a list of the top ten governmental officers that visited Prabhupāda and had room conversations with him. There would be the top religious or cult leaders who Prabhupāda met with and confronted. The meeting with Yogi Bhajan at the Honolulu center on Coelho Way in the first week of June, 1975 would certainly qualify.

Next, we come the category of room conversations with his initiated disciples and dedicated followers. They entirely took place in one of his rooms at one of his centers and must be considered the most important of all room conversations. Except for the Neo-Mutt faction, what we will find and acknowledge when it comes to grading the importance of these is one room conversation in particular. Indeed, it stands alone, far above all of the rest. Even throw in all of the room conversations with anyone and everyone, it still stands alone. It is completely on a separate and higher scale all by itself. Sure, it was momentous, but it was much more than that. It was integral to what was supposed to transpire in his movement and what actually went down.

The tape recording of it was secreted away for years, until the summer of 1980. Although all governing body commissioners attended it (and were ordered to do so), only six of them were actually privy to the essential part of it. Only that essence is the part that will be analyzed here. It became known in devotee scuttlebutt as the appointment tape, a consequential misnomer created with an intentional design to mislead.

As just mentioned, in the long run, only a very small portion of it was actually important to the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. That small part of this particular room conversation–not much more than a minute in duration, if that—is considered controversial. However, if you want to transcend the so-called controversy surrounding it, you are herein given the opportunity to do so. It can be understood, and it must be understood.

If you are sincere and serious in spiritual life and if you identify with Prabhupāda’s branch of Caitanya’s Hare Kṛṣṇa movement, after hearing and/or reading this presentation, you will understand this discussion accurately and in some detail, be assured.

This multi-part series reviews the second literary work of Henry Doktorski. As an established author who knows well how to order chapters in his literary publications, to his great credit, he quickly proceeds to the controversy surrounding the so-called “appointment tape” recorded in the late Spring of 1977. This is astute on his part.

In the first chapter of Eleven Naked Emperors (henceforth to be referred to by its acronym of E.N.E.), he presents a synopsis of the history of Gauḍīya Vaiṣṇavism and the place of Prabhupāda’s branch in it. He also presents some essential biographical notes mostly connected to Prabhupāda’s beginning his movement in America.

In the second chapter, focusing upon the early days of the movement, he points out how Prabhupāda’s leading men came from entirely mleccha and degraded stock and thus not much could be expected of them. Indeed, that degradation is exactly how the saga played out after Prabhupāda left physical manifestation late in 1977.

It was brilliant of the author, after those first chapters (focused mostly upon the Sixties) to skip far ahead to that important meeting a decade later. E.N.E. thus avoids much clutter of the intervening years, because getting into all of that—what to speak of detailing–the vast majority of what went down within that time stamp would be unnecessary.

As aforementioned, the so-called appointment tape was recorded on May 28, 1977 in Raman Reti, a district near the Yamuna River within the famous devotional village of Vṛndāvan, India. It was recorded in Prabhupāda’s quarters within the Kṛṣṇa-Balarām temple complex. It was apparently attended by all of the Governing Body Commissioners of ISKCON; at least, all of them had been summoned to attend it.

However, the essential part of this conversation between the great spiritual master and his incompetent leading secretaries was directly witnessed by only six commissioners. That took place in an adjunct room connected to the main area of his personal quarters. Two of them asked questions and made comments, some of those being inane. The other four remained silent, which remains most disappointing. This brief interlude of the essential part of the overall meeting is what this month’s presentation—as well as Chapter Three of E.N.E.—centers upon.

In other words, although some other topics and business issues were discussed amongst the whole G.B.C. assembly, many were of spur of the moment, transitory importance. One of them related (in an obtuse way) to this essential part of the conversation, but the rest of them did not. We shall not devote time or font space to any of that, obviously, although E.N.E. mentions quite a bit of it.

Satsvarūpa Gosvāmī was selected (how he was so selected is not clear) to ask two questions of Prabhupāda and seek clarification if need be (and let me tell you, was clarification ever needed!). One of those questions, obviously, was of maximum, raw nerve variety.

It was a bad play by the G.B.C. to pick “Saintly Sutz” for this assignment. The embodiment of humble pie, he was also too laid back to be the lead questioner. Almost any other long-serving commissioner would have done a better job than Satsvarūpa, who could be (and was!) easily overridden by any leading secretary more powerful. Indeed, that is exactly what went down, i.e., he was interfered with and overridden by the powerful nyāsī, T.K.G., who was the personal secretary of Prabhupāda at the time.

You will confirm this for yourself as the analysis proceeds. Early in Chapter Three, E.N.E. points out how Satsvarūpa was a bad pick to conduct the interview:

“Later, he (Satsvarūpa) confessed that he felt ‘shy and uneasy’ and ‘foolish and awkward’ during this important conversation with his spiritual master. Consequently, Satsvarūpa’s questions were difficult to understand. Bhaktivedānta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s answers, therefore, were also not easy to understand, and since then, scholars and pundits have espoused very different and diametrically opposed interpretations of this important conversation.”1

Very accurate overview, but it should not be misinterpreted to mean that all of those interpretations are accurate. Most of them are not and are way off! If they are all opposed in some way (which is the case), then either none of them is accurate or, at most, only one of them could actually be called accurate. As such, do not fall victim to the sentimental psychic syrup of giving them all equal credence.

Although the key exchanges between Satsvarūpa, T.K.G. and Prabhupāda will be presented in chronological order, we are not going to continuously post it in unbroken form or in one fell swoop. Instead, your host speaker is going to break it up into sections in accordance with how E.N.E. divided it in that same way in Chapter Three. Accordingly, there will be accurate analysis after each section.

Let us proceed from the beginning.

Satsvarūpa: . . . our next question concerns initiations in the future, particularly at that time when you’re no longer with us. We want to know how first and second initiation would be conducted.

Prabhupāda: Yes. I shall recommend some of you. After this is settled up, I shall recommend some of you to act as officiating ācāryas.

T.K.G.: Is that called rittvik-ācārya?

Prabhupāda: Rittvik, yes.

E.N.E. comments on this opening section as follows:

“Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s immediate answer is simple and straightforward: He would recommend some of his disciples to act as ritvik ācāryas. None of the G.B.C. members at the meeting could imagine . . . that their spiritual master intended after his passing that the disciplic succession would be continued by ritvik representation. An order to continue the parampara by ritvik representation would have been unprecedented in the history of Gauḍīya-Vaishnavism.”2

This is a spot on commentary. It is rather self-evident but nevertheless recognized as such by E.N.E.. Its author mentions that no one in the room could possibly have fathomed that this answer given by Prabhupāda had anything to do with how the movement would be carried on after he passed from physical manifestation. Very correct. This fact was buttressed by Doktorski a bit later in the chapter as follows:

“The devotees assumed that Prabhupāda’s answer regarding ritvik ācāryas referred only to the first question: how will initiations be conducted during his presence.”3

Correct, again. Heavy māyā then enters the conversation, and it is introduced by Satsvarūpa when he mixes apples and oranges as follows:

Satsvarūpa: Then what is the relationship of that person who gives the initiation and the . . .

Prabhupāda: He’s guru. He’s guru.

Satsvarūpa: But he does it on your behalf.

Prabhupāda: Yes. That is formality. Because in my presence one should not become guru, so on my behalf, on my order. “amāra ajñāya guru hāna.” Be actually guru, but by my order.

E.N.E. picks up on this māyā to some extent . . . but far from fully:

“Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda explained that a disciple who was sufficiently advanced to become a bona fide dīkṣā guru would not initiate his own disciples until after Prabhupāda had passed away (“that is formality”). The disciple would be dīkṣā guru after the departure of the acharya, but not without first receiving a direct order from the spiritual master: ‘Be actually guru, but by my order.’”4

This last quote from Prabhupāda—and the concept underlying it—was integral to the conversation, granted. However, it was particularly reinforced near the end of it. Introducing it here–while commenting on Satsvarūpa mixing up the guru who gives the initiation (and that guru can only be Prabhupāda)–acts kind of like a hanging participle.

However, this is of minor consequence. The main point is that Satsvarūpa is careless with his terminology, and Prabhupāda decides not to clarify his mistake of combining the guru who gives the initiation (which always means the dīkṣā-guru) and the rittvik, who merely conducts the ceremony. The actual fact is that Prabhupāda, covertly but effectively, dealt with both Satsvarūpa and T.K.G. tersely in this conversation, and both of those men thoroughly deserved that treatment.

TATTVAMASI

Again, there were four other sannyāsīs present (Rūpānuga, Kīrtanānanda, Bhagavān, and Jagadīśa), but not one of them spoke up. Of course, as we all know now, the mega-egotistical T.K.G. interjected at this point and made his presence known in order to muddy the waters even further:

Satsvarūpa: So, they may also be considered your disciples.

Prabhupāda: Yes, they are disciples. Why consider? Who?

T.K.G.: No, he’s asking that these ritvik acharyas, they’re officiating, giving dīkṣā. . . . The people who they give dīkṣā to, whose disciple are they?

Prabhupāda: They’re his disciple.?

T.K.G.: They’re his disciple.?

Prabhupāda: Who is initiating. He is grand disciple.

Satsvarūpa: Yes.?

T.K.G.: That’s clear.

As clear as mud! This is the middle of the conversation. T.K.G. sees that the rittvik has now allegedly been empowered to also be the dīkṣā-guru. He sees wrong, but it fits nicely into his desired paradigm. He could easily parlay this misconception into the rittviks transmogrifying into initiating spiritual masters after Prabhupāda “was no longer with us.” That is what he and the others did. He does not seek necessary clarification, because he likes what he is hearing. He can use it, and he did use it.

From this middle part, for all practical purposes, we get nothing. It is a jumble of nonsense, particularly made so by T.K.G. It is loaded with māyā, and Prabhupāda could not have been expected to have picked through and corrected all of that . . . and he didn’t.

The māyā, however, could have even dug deeper. Those six men in the room could have concluded that the rittvik ācāryas of the coming present time (eleven of them would be named soon after) would also be making their own disciples even while Prabhupāda was physically present, as absurd as that sounds on the face of it.

In other words, a loose interpretation could have been made that the rittviks, while they were performing the ceremony on his behalf, were also and simultaneously dīkṣā-gurus of these new disciples. In 2006, this is more or less what was proposed by a then new offshoot faction of the Rittvik heresy known as “Prominent Link.

Prabhupāda could have cleared all of this up, but he chose not to do so.

I personally glorify him for making that decision. E.N.E. does not get heavy into the potential contradictory juxtaposition, although it does recognize it as muddying the waters with this entry:

“Although T.K.G. says ‘That’s clear,’ he was certainly incorrect in that conclusion, as the whole flow of these questions, interruptions, and interjected opinions by the two sannyāsīs made the whole thing very unclear.”5

Thus far, as we make our way through Chapter Three, E.N.E. is accurate and helpful. In one sentence here, excellently constructed, its author has summarized an important conclusion: The two men selected to get their questions answered muddied the waters (particular T.K.G.) with absurd questions, interruptions, comments, and presumptions. Actually, E.N.E. treats them with kid gloves in this comment by calling T.K.G.’s quick summary (“That’s clear”) as merely “incorrect.” It was far worse than that, as it laid the groundwork for future false pre-suppositions.

Doktorski continues, just a bit later, with the following overview:

“Any disciple must first become spiritually advanced and then, just as importantly, receive the personal order from his spiritual master to become a dīkṣā guru. If he does not receive the personal order, he cannot initiate anyone into the devotional line, because he is not an initiating spiritual master.” 6

To a degree, he is getting ahead of himself here with this comment, but that can be readily overlooked. In the Vaiṣṇava branch established by His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda, in order to be guru, the guru, the spiritual master, must be a very perfect man. 7

E.N.E. touches upon this truth here and does state that the dīkṣā-guru must be spiritually advanced.

E.N.E. also states that the guru must receive the order to be an initiating guru directly from his guru. In this case, that would only be Prabhupāda, because this conversation was taking place while he is still physically manifest. We then reach the conclusion of this brief and enigmatic section of the all-important room conversation of May 28, 1977:

Satsvarūpa: Then, we have a question concerning . . .

Prabhupāda: When I order, “You become guru,” he becomes regular guru. That’s all. He becomes disciple of my disciple. That’s it.

We are obliged to spend a good deal of time and font space on this conclusion, because there is so much spiritual substance to it. First of all, it complete obliterates any legitimacy to the illusion that this exchange between Satsvarūpa, T.K.G. and Prabhupāda, just presented, was all about the rittvik-in-absentia concoction. Most definitely that māyā is smashed here by the statement “disciple of my disciple.”

The term “regular guru” is introduced. Some consider it to be unclear and a bit enigmatic, but it really is not:

“The statements of Thakura Bhaktivinode are as good as scriptures because he is liberated person. generally, the spiritual master comes from the group of such eternal associates of the Lord, but anyone who follows the principles of such ever liberated persons is as good as one in the above mentioned group.

The gurus from nature’s study are accepted as such on the principle that an elevated person in Krishna Consciousness does not accept anyone as disciple, but he accepts everyone as expansion of his guru. . . A person who is liberated acharya and guru cannot commit any mistake, but there are persons who are less qualified or not liberated, but still can act as guru and acharya by strictly following the disciplic succession.” 8

“13. He must not take on unlimited disciples. This means that a candidate who has successfully followed the first twelve items can also become a spiritual master himself, just as a student becomes a monitor in class with a limited number of disciples.” 9

“The second-class devotees are therefore meant for preaching work, and as referred to in the above verse, they must loudly preach the glories of the Lord. The second-class devotee accepts disciples from the section of third-class devotees or nondevotees.” 10

Your host speaker could provide even more conclusive evidence than these three quotes, but these alone should suffice. Notice the following terms and descriptions: follows the principles, as good as (a liberated ācārya), guru from nature’s study (still connected to material nature), less qualified and not liberated, still can act as guru, strictly following (“Little thing. Strictly following”), can also become a spiritual master, a monitor, must take only a limited number of disciples.

Regular means under regulation. Vidhi sādhana-bhakti means under regulation. Such devotees, when advanced, still must be strict followers of the rules and regulations. Where is the difficulty? This devotee is obviously the regular guru spoken of by Prabhupāda in the Q&A of May, 1977. The monitor guru accepts a limited number of disciples. He is not fully liberated. Māyā is still studying him and has not fully released him, although he is advanced spiritually.

Prabhupāda summed up the whole issue concisely and clearly. He also demolished what would turn out to be the Rittvik heresy about a dozen years later. Did he foresee that? Sure. As such, he crushed it. “When I order” is self-evident, and he never officially ordered any of his disciples to be initiating spiritual masters. There is no official record of that, and that record would be required.

He only appointed rittviks.

As such, Prabhupāda answered both questions. He appointed rittviks in the second week of July of 1977, so initiations in that present time would be re-instituted. And, although he never officially recognized or appointed any initiating spiritual masters, he spoke on the principle. Rittvik got crushed in advance. A tremendous and concise summary by the greatest spiritual master in the presence of dull secretaries, who only muddied the waters with their inane presumptions and interruptions.

E.N.E. then follows all of this up with some more commentary, and, most unfortunately, māyā enters into it:

“In this passage, Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda explains, ‘He [my disciple] becomes regular guru. That’s all.’ But what exactly is a ‘regular guru?’ In the entire Bhaktivedanta VedaBase, this is the only time he mentions ‘regular guru.’ Some of Prabhupāda’s disciples interpret ‘regular guru’ to simply mean ‘śikṣā guru,’ and others interpret it to mean a madhyama-adhikārī dīkṣā guru who has not yet achieved perfection (the uttama-adhikārī stage) and therefore must follow the regulations (the word ‘regular’ appears to refer to ‘regulation’) of vaidhi-sadhana bhakti: devotional service according to scriptural rules and regulations.” 10

Why mention the nonsense opinion that regular guru allegedly refers to śikṣā-guru? It is an absurdity! The whole discussion with Prabhupāda centered around initiation. Note that śikṣā-guru was never mentioned in it. All of a sudden, Prabhupāda would arbitrarily switch to the topic of śikṣā-guru, although none of the previous questions and answers had anything to do with either a vartma-pradarśaka or śikṣā-guru?

There are some other comments that do not produce clarity in this chapter, but I see no need to list them. This one lends credence to an idea that rittviks can manipulate into evidence that the whole of the discussion was about rittvik. Only the beginning was about rittvik-ācāryas, and that is self-evident. The other mayikā comments in the chapter are all minor and do not of consequence . . . if they produce any damage at all.

“The important portion of the May 28, 1977 conversation with Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda, which concerned initiations at present and after Prabhupāda’s departure in the future, was more or less botched by the two sannyāsīs who asked the questions. Although it is very muddled by Satsvarūpa and Tamal Krishna, some claim it still can be conceptually understood.” 11

Your host speaker is one of those who claim that it can be conceptually understood. We understand it, and now, with this presentation, you are also invited to understand it in the same way . . . the same right way.

In other words, to employ an analogy, there is a heavy fog surrounding and encompassing all the various interpretations of this May 28th discussion about initiations in the present (1977) and then initiations after Prabhupāda is no longer physically manifest. We require complete clarity. That only produces the right interpretation. Others are misinterpretations, which are biased and meant to mislead.

E.N.E. removes the heavy fog and it removes lighter fog, also. It leaves a mist, however. As such, Chapter Three cannot be classified as completely valid by any measure in relation to its interpretation. Nevertheless, it is helpful. We require to interpret and realize this crossroads moment event in the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement in the right way. We require to see it and interpret it clearly. We cannot settle for mist. We require to see it just as you see the reflection of the Sun on a placid pond at noon on a cloudless day . . . and that is what you are provided here.

We do not want any māyā allowed access in relation to the accurate interpretation of this essential discussion of guru, initiation, and initiated disciples. Although Chapter Three does conjure up some of that māyā (in the name of being fair and balanced?), I have intentionally chosen to only give an example of one such instance.

This detailed chapter of E.N.E. provides too much transcendental good in order to give it an average grade. It is certainly an above-average effort, and, as aforementioned, its placement at the beginning of the book, as the third chapter, is an example of higher intelligence. It merits a straight B, and that is the grade I thus give it.

In summary, here is what you should glean from the correct, unbiased, and accurate analysis of this essential room conversation on May 28, 1977:

1) Prabhupāda was asked two questions, not just one. Although Satsvarūpa foolishly joined these two separate questions with the conjunction (“and”), Prabhupāda was not at all obliged to correct that fault;

2) He was asked how initiations were to be conducted at the present time (meaning, as it turned out, more or less the rest of 1977) and how they were to be conducted after he was “no longer with us.” He answered both questions separately in ingenious and concise ways;

3) When Satsvarūpa conjoined rittvik with the dīkṣā-guru, māyā entered in a big way. The interview from that point on was botched, although Prabhupāda did his best to give us spiritual substance despite that flaw;

4) All of T.K.G.’s interruptions and false clarifications were on the basis of the conjoining of rittvik with dīkṣā. As such, they were all māyā. They did not produce any clarity whatsoever. On the contrary, they produced heavy fog. When T.K.G. said, “that’s clear,” it was nothing more than subconsciously mocking his own self and fellow sannyāsī. It was not merely a Freudian slip, because he was able to get what he wanted from Prabhupāda, and, having done so, he unsuccessfully attempted to terminate the discussion at that point;

5) Prabhupāda knew T.K.G.’s actual motive the whole time, and, as such, he made no effort to expose it. Instead, he gave all six of them enough rope by which they could hang themselves. This is exactly what they did when they converted, with the much needed help of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar, their appointments as rittviks into appointments as dīkṣā-gurus, although Prabhupāda never authorized any such transitive pre-supposition;

6) His Divine Grace crushed Rittvik, in advance of its event horizon in late 1989 (which, as tri-kāla-jña, he knew would manifest) via the terminology disciple of my disciple;

7) In principle, Prabhupāda only authorized regular gurus. That means he only authorized madhyam-adhikārīs. He never officially, appointed, recognized, or named any regular gurus, what to speak of a Successor;

8) He made it crystal clear that just such a regular guru could only be authorized to initiate new disciples on his order, i.e., they could not become genuine gurus on their own authorization or on the authorization of the governing body;

9) That the tape recording of this essential room conversation was called “the appointment tape” was the misnomer of the 20th Century. That almost no one even knew that this went down in the Spring of 1977 is a travesty. The tape (what to speak of its transcript) was squirreled away in a vault at Los Angeles and hidden from the devotees at large—the real workers—for over three years; this tells you all you need to know about the pathological and deceptive statuses of the “ISKCON” misleaders.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. The Hare Kṛṣṇa movement was converted into its doppelganger in the Spring of 1978 when eleven ultra-ambitious sociopaths became fully absorbed in self-apotheosis and took over both the governing body and its movement at large.

They did so via bogus authorizations. One such “authorization” was the phantom of an appointment tape recorded in early 1977. Until years later, virtually all devotees in the movement did not come to realize that this appointment was, in actuality, an appointment that never was. It was a crossroads moment when it went down, and the leaders of the movement failed all of us by taking the wrong path at that crossroads.

In the purport to Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, 2.9.43, Prabhupāda specifically states the Vedic truth: “One who is now the disciple is the next spiritual master.” If you have not analyzed this room conversation until now, then you are also at a crossroads moment. Make the right choice and take the fork in the road on the path that leads to light. Such a step certainly entails a rejection of “ISKCON” and a rejection of Rittvik, which both misuse the so-called appointment tape . . . but in vastly different ways. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 72). Kindle Edition;

2 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 73). Kindle Edition;

3 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (pp. 73-74). Kindle Edition;

4 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 75). Kindle Edition;

5 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 76). Kindle Edition;

6 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 77). Kindle Edition;

7 “Now, to take such guidance means the spiritual master should also be a very perfect man. Otherwise, how can he guide?” Platform lecture on Bhagavad-gītā in New York on March 2, 1966;

8 Letter to Janārdana, 4-26-68;

9 Easy Journey to Other Planets, Chapter One: “Anti-material Worlds”;

10 Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, 2.3.21, purport;

11 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (pp. 77-78). Kindle Edition;

12 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 72). Kindle Edition.


Podcast transcription (September 1, 2024): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Four by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Four of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

The process of Kṛṣṇa consciousness is known by many terms, each of which signals the particular emphasis of a prominent trait in it. For example, you have all read and heard that Kṛṣṇa consciousness is called bhakti-yoga. Bhakti technically refers to bhāva, an extremely advanced stage of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Yet, every devotee who applies himself or herself to the process experiences fleeting moments of bhāva or ecstasy within, often even at the beginning of the neophyte stage. It is thus not a misnomer to call the overall process by the term bhakti-yoga, and Prabhupāda advertised it as such.

It is sometimes called sādhana bhakti. It is sometimes called vidhi-sādhana bhakti. It is sometimes called rāgānuga-sādhana bhakti. It is sometimes called sādhya-bhakti, and that is at bhāva. Siddhānta Sarasvātī, in a purport to his commentary on Brahma-Saṁhitā, has also called it jñāna-bhakti yoga, as per that preliminary stage.

Kṛṣṇa consciousness is also sometimes called mantra-yoga, and this is because—especially in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Caitanya sampradāya—The Hare Kṛṣṇa mantra is emphasized and integral to an obligatory ritual for all disciples under his direction and guidance. Chanting sixteen rounds daily–every day of every week of every month of every year—is no mean feat. As such, the yoga can appropriately be called mantra-yoga.

Kṛṣṇa consciousness is also sometimes called seva-yoga. Seva means service. No devotee in the branch of the line that Prabhupāda established was ever unaware of his stress upon—indeed, demand for—each of them to serve him and his institution. There was a chain of command in Prabhupāda’s Kṛṣṇa conscious movement.

You received your marching orders to serve each day from that chain of command. It was as if being in military discipline, and you tried with due diligence to be successful in the service deputed to you. Now and then, you were given some opportunity to serve Prabhupāda directly. However, for most of the rank-and-file—for most of the real workers—you received your deputed service from the temple president or the collection commander or your sannyasi and carried it out.

Kṛṣṇa consciousness is also sometimes called buddhi-yoga. This has been a bit misunderstood over the years. I shall not delve heavily into that, although I have touched upon it in the past. An ultra-elevated status of buddhi-yoga, particularly mentioned in the Tenth Chapter of Bhagavad-gītā, is not what is being referred to here. Instead, what is being referred to is the working principles of buddhi-yoga. In this system, you fully apply your intelligence to your service to the guru and the prosecution of your sādhana. This generally leads to success in your objectives, all of which are dovetailed to the orders of the spiritual master as given and carried out by disciples in his hierarchical chain.

Pardon me for this somewhat lengthy prologue, which serves not only as knowledge but mostly as an example. It is an example that the name or label does not matter—at least, not very much—as long as the genuine process and system of the topmost yoga given us is being referred to by use of any of these terms. This system only works when that hierarchy giving the orders is not deviated . . .

. . . and we shall certainly more than merely touch upon this truth (we always do) as the presentation proceeds.

When action via the working principles of buddhi-yoga is prosecuted in the right way, your intelligence (the word buddhi means intelligence) will become more powerful, more determined, more purified, and sharper. When a hierarchy in so-called Kṛṣṇa consciousness is deviated, however, utilizing any of these abovementioned terms to refer to it is not describing what it purports to describe. Determination of the intelligence is integral to its prosecution, and it is particularly applicable to the transcendental system. In due course, buddhi becomes so purified that it transmutes itself into prajñā, but understanding this requires a long explanation. That would be diversionary at this point and will not be undertaken.

In the line of disciplic succession brought to us by Prabhupāda, in whichever name you wish to label that spiritual process, you are emphasizing a prominent trait of the process. There is nothing wrong with that. However, integral to whichever label you choose, the process you are referring to must be completely bona fide at any of its stages.

If it is so, then it is linked to the disciplic succession through the most recent Ācārya (capital “ā”), the great man who delivered the devotional process to the Western world. Initiation into the line of disciplic succession provides a link for the prosecution of the yoga given to the disciple via his or her dīkṣā-guru. Initiation is integral to any yoga system, and it was also integral to Prabhupāda’s movement. Everything previous to genuine initiation has less value when compared to when genuine initiation is empowering an individual devotee (one who follows) further.

The initiated devotee is empowered to prosecute yoga during his or her probationary period within the transcendental system. Bhakti-yoga equals mantra-yoga equals seva-yoga equals buddhi-yoga as long as they are all actual yoga. The name utilized to describe the yoga emphasizes what is only a secondary consideration, if even that.

In terms of the initiation process, Prabhupāda introduced something new in the early Seventies. His movement was growing fast. The number of his temples was expanding rapidly, especially in the United States where he first established his movement. He could not at all easily continue to personally perform the rituals of initiation ceremonies, and thus he introduced rittvik initiations.

In these ceremonial processes, he no longer performed the initiation rituals. Instead, he had one of his elder disciples perform it on his behalf. In some cases (the minority), he was personally present on the Vyāsasāna to witness the initiation. When this was the case, he gave the beads to his new disciple and informed him of the new spiritual name that the devotee would now be known by throughout the movement.

In most cases, once this rittvik system of initiation was introduced, the temple president would receive a package containing a letter from Prabhupāda, wherein the Western names were juxtaposed to a spiritual name. The japa mala beads, often chanted on by Prabhupāda in advance, would be included in the package. The devotee assigned to be a rittvik and conduct the initiation ceremony would then make all of the arrangements: He would determine the date of the ceremony (always held in his temple, obviously), and everything would be carried out in this way, which was fully authorized. It was fully authorized, because the Founder-Ācārya created and thus authorized it.

In due course of time, this became known as rittvik initiation. However, in the early to mid-Seventies, every devotee receiving initiation in this way knew perfectly well that Prabhupāda was his dīkṣā-guru. No one considered rittvik initiation to connote anything else. The devotees receiving initiation were cent-per-cent fixated upon Prabhupāda as their initiating spiritual master, although he was not physically present at the ceremony. When asked, a devotee may say that he received a rittvik initiation, but everyone knew what that meant.

As just alluded to, you could say that there was a kind of in-between initiation for those who received the Harer Nāma or even brāhmin initiation. I have personal experience of this. In my Harer Nāma initiation (wherein I received my spiritual name and my beads), Prabhupāda was on his Vyāsasāna. Two rittviks chanted on the beads just below him and then handed the beads up to him. In other words, he deputed them to chant on the beads on his behalf.

It was a very large ceremony, and I came up to him from the end of the line. Prabhupāda then handed me my beads and gave me my spiritual name. However, I learned later than my name had been selected by his personal secretary (Pradyumna), and Prabhupāda accepted what Pradyumna determined to be my new spiritual name. A rittvik performed the actual fire sacrifice after all of this.

At my brāhminical initiation, Prabhupāda draped the brāhmin thread around my head, neck, and shoulder, and he showed me how to count on the interior indexes of the finger joints of my right hand. The Gāyātri mantra that is chanted by brāhmins in his branch was given to me either a bit before this (when I was alone in that private room with him) or immediately afterward.

You can say that there were different processes back in the day connoting different ways and means for the process of initiation to be conducted. There was what could be called direct initiation, wherein Prabhupāda conducted everything personally himself. Then, there were different varieties of initiation, one of which could be called rittvik initiation with Prabhupāda active and physically present. And then there was the rittivk initiation where Prabhupāda was not physically present. This initiation became the main process for the majority of devotees by the mid-Seventies, as could only have been expected.

Nevertheless, they were all equal. Whatever label you chose to use, they all were genuine initiation processes offered by a bona fide spiritual master, one who was personally manifest somewhere in the world, even if not directly present at the ceremony or transmitting the Gāyātri mantra. I have illustrated this principle by delineating previous yoga labels.

Our presentation this month is in continuation of analyzing Eleven Naked Emperors (henceforward, ENE), a book authored by Henry Doktorski. We are now at Chapter Four. The book covers everything connected to the zonal ācārya takeover of Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement in the late Seventies and much of the Eighties.

We have thus far analyzed its first three chapters. We now proceed to Chapter Four, entitled “Ritvik Priests.” How Doktorski spells this word is not the technical Vedic spelling, but I am not at all criticizing him for that. The spelling “ritvic” is what is employed in his book, but even that is not technically accurate. The actual Sanskrit is “rtvic.”

A rose by any other name. Those who fault-find based upon the spelling of this term are superficial beings only posing as transcendentalists. They are prone to find any little thing that they can concoct in order to cast aspersions, especially against those who expose their institution. It is nonsense to get hung up about this word’s spelling.

As many of you know, I spell the word differently from all of these other spellings. I apply phonetics in my spelling: Rittvik. You will thus pronounce the word how it should be pronounced when you read it in any of my articles. It was spelled like this by many (if not most) devotees back in the day, especially once rittvik initiation became predominant, which was the case no later than 1971.

As such, throughout this month’s review of Chapter Four, I shall present the spelling of rtvic, ritvic, or ritvik as rittvik. This means that, whenever ENE refers to the word—which obviously is very often—I am modifying what is in the book’s text. This should be considered inconsequential, especially since I have explained why I spell the word the way that I do and have also specifically explained what my spelling is.

“After considering the recommendation, these representatives may accept the devotee as an initiated disciple of Śrīla Prabhupāda by giving a spiritual name, or in the case of second initiation, by chanting on the Gāyātri thread, just as Śrīla Prabhupāda has done. The newly initiated devotees are disciples of His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedānta Swāmi Prabhupāda, the above eleven senior devotees acting as his representative.”

This excerpt is contained in the letter which re-established the rittvik system of initiation in the second week of July, 1977. This letter is quite important, but it was not dictated by Prabhupāda; that becomes immediately obvious when reading it. It was created by the notorious T.K.G., who was the evil gatekeeper of Prabhupāda for almost all of that final fateful year. Prabhupāda simply signed his name on a line near the left bottom of the letter, listed as “authorized.”

In and of itself, the letter is not flawed. Eleven senior men are named to again provide rittvik initiations to newcomers coming to Prabhupāda’s movement. For months, there had been no initiations, and now initiations were resuming. The only change was of no major consequence: The nearest rittvik would approve the recommendation that a newcomer be initiated, which meant that Prabhupāda would not be consulted.

Despite being recommended by his temple president, I am aware of at least one devotee who Prabhupāda refused to initiate prior to 1977. He approved almost all recommendations sent to him by temple presidents and sannyāsīs. Everybody knows this. He depended upon the discrimination of his temple presidents; in his final year with us, it was still the same system with one intermediate step vacated. No big deal.

In ENE, the following example of one of the very first rittvik initiations is given, and there is something to glean from it:

“From Georgetown, Guyana, we wrote Śrīla Prabhupāda asking him to give Vaikunthanath brāhmin initiation so we could worship deities as I had been given Gāyātri initiation previous to marriage. In his return letter, Śrīla Prabhupāda said that any brāhmin could perform the ceremony and give Vaikunthanath Gāyātri. He said Saradiya, or any brāhmin could do it. So I performed the sacred fire sacrifice before a few dozen guests . . .” 1

It was always well known by all devotees in the movement that rittvik initiation made the new disciple an initiate of Prabhupāda, not an initiated disciple of the rittvik performing the ceremony. In point of fact, that duty was nothing more than a temporary seva. The newly-initiated devotee owed the rittvik no allegiance nor did he have to be concerned about any of the technicalities of the ceremony.

Once the rittvik process was re-established in 1977, that the new initiate was Prabhupāda’s disciple was made clear, viz., “The newly initiated devotees are disciples of His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda, the above eleven senior devotees acting as his representative.”

ENE presents a quote from Prabhupāda verifying this fact:

“Prabhupāda reminded him that the disciples he initiates are not his disciples; they are Prabhupāda’s disciples. ‘They shall, of course, still be considered as my disciples, not that they shall become your disciples, but you will be empowered by me to chant their beads, and that is the same effect of binding master and disciple as if I were personally chanting.’” 2

As Chapter Four unfolds, ENE lists how, during a two-day period and one after another, various senior men were selected and authorized to be rittviks. It was, once again, an example of outstanding research by Doktorski, but there is no need to repeat any of those historical details. Of course, at the very beginning, we were given the example of a female devotee (who had received brāhminical initiation) authorized to act as a rittvik in order to have her husband share the Deity duties, which require a brāhmin. Always keep the rittvik in perspective, and that particular example should certainly help you to do so.

In the Seventies, Prabhupāda wanted the rittviks to expand in number, although not every Tom, Dick, or Bhakta Harry would qualify for the post, obviously. ENE points this out as follows:

“In 1974, Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda indicated that any G.B.C. member or sannyāsī could chant on a new candidate’s beads and initiate disciples on his behalf. The beads may be chanted upon by a sannyāsī or G.B.C. man.” 3

Your host speaker has thus set the historical background, and now it is time to confront the chief issue that is raised in Chapter Four. As could only be expected, that issue was the product of the Machiavellian Manipulator, T.K.G. After all, he wrote that rittvik letter (merely signed by Prabhupāda), which was then snail mailed to all temple presidents. It was a list of eleven names, but did it imply more than what was clearly stated within it? T.K.G. claimed that it did:

“Śrīla Prabhupāda said he would appoint several devotees who shall perform initiation in the future, even after his disappearance. The disciples they accept shall be their disciples and Śrīla Prabhupāda would be their grand spiritual master. . . . Śrīla Prabhupāda clearly appointed eleven successors for giving initiation. . . . Everything is clearly documented, either by tape recordings or signed letters, so there is no room for any doubt whatsoever. Anyone who expresses doubt or disbelief is in ignorance of the facts.” 4

TATTVAMASI

Successors? No room for doubt? Horsecrap!

It can be argued that, at least technically, this is the initial source of the nescience that led to the smash-and-grab takeover by the eleven pretender zonals in the Spring of 1978. When T.K.G. claims that “everything is clearly documented,” he is making a drastically false claim. There is no documentation whatsoever that establishes this transference appointment of power from rittvik to dīkṣā-guru to Successor. It is a malefic myth, but almost everyone in the movement in the late Seventies and early Eighties believed it. It had the power of The Big Lie.

Everyone accepted it. No one could even think that the “ISKCON” leaders were lying when they alleged that they had been appointed by Prabhupāda to be gurus in both May of 1977 at Raman Reti (in theory) and according to transitive acknowledgment in July of 1977 via the aforementioned rittvik letter created by T.K.G. The idea that the appointment of eleven rittviks was the covert appointment of eleven dīkṣā-gurus is a devastating, false pre-supposition. As such, the initiations that these so-called rittviks prosecuted later—because they were no longer rittviks after Prabhupāda departed–were completely unauthorized.

On the other hand, it is a major misconception—indeed, a heresy—to advocate the counter pre-supposition that they remained rittviks and were to conduct rittvik initiations after Prabhupāda disappeared. This dichotomy has created a binary of two major deviations via the dreadful sahajiyā cults of “ISKCON” and Rittvik.

Each is based upon a different and conflicting pre-supposition to what the appointment of eleven senior men (to the position of ritual conductors) was and entailed during the four-plus months that Prabhupāda remained manifest on the physical plane in 1977. ENE expresses doubt that the eleven rittviks were meant to automatically become dīkṣā-gurus by their rittvik appointments in July of 1977:

“Did Prabhupāda intend, as Tamal Krishna claimed, that the eleven should be automatically promoted to the position of full-fledged dīkṣā gurus after his passing? Perhaps not. It is more likely that Prabhupāda merely gave the eleven the first opportunity to prove that they could function as dīkṣā gurus. As a group, he never gave them a direct or official order to function in that capacity . . .” 5

There are two considerations here: The transitive claim is most doubtful, and no one received an official order to be a dīkṣā-guru. ENE goes on to mention claims allegedly made by some devotees that Prabhupāda authorized each of them privately. Then, why didn’t these “gurus” speak up when the deviation was rolled out and implemented? They had a duty to do so, but they remained silent!

They were not gurus, because a genuine guru would not shrink from explicitly and boldly defending his spiritual master’s movement by railing against all that went down in the Spring of 1978. On the other hand, if they were gurus—which is not the view of your host speaker—then each and every one of those cowards fell down immediately in 1978 for the anartha of dereliction of duty.

ENE then segues into a diversion about missing tapes and some personal servant’s having overheard—allegedly–that Prabhupāda created a brand new system of Rittvik to be implemented after his physical departure. The missing tapes were supposed to have verified this system, which Prabhupāda would never have created. No guru can create such an unprecedented system wherein he remains the only initiating spiritual master for many years, or many decades, or many centuries or for the remainder of the Golden Age or for the remainder of Kali-yuga. It is a defect in this chapter that any of this diversion was even explored at all, and that is a flaw but not too serious.

ENE then provides two examples of where T.K.G. keeps other senior men from approaching Prabhupāda to seek clarification as to what was to be done—especially in relation to initiations—after he gave up his manifest body. These examples are both valuable. You can read the book if you want to know the specifics connected to these anecdotes, and I urge you to do so. T.K.G. was the agent of Kali in virtually everything he did and did not permit in those final months. One of his close buddies informed him that there would likely be really big problems up the road if the clarification he wanted was not attained.

That can be called the understatement of the century!

Next, ENE delves into a raw nerve topic: After Prabhupāda departed, how to determine whether or not a devotee was to become an initiating spiritual master, a dīkṣā-guru. This part of the chapter contains two opposing views and also is a product of painstaking, meticulous research:

“Vaishnavas believe that the personal order from the spiritual master to initiate disciples can also come after the spiritual master has departed, as in a dream. For instance, Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupada accepted the sannyasa order on September 17, 1959 because of the urging of his godbrothers and recurring dreams of his spiritual master Bhaktisiddhanta Saraswati Prabhupāda appearing to him and ordering him to take this important step.

Other advanced Vaishnavas and Vaishnavis have also received orders during dreams to initiate disciples. When the King of Orissa, Mukunda Deva (who reigned as monarch from 1559 to 1568), requested Vaishnava initiation from Ganga-Mata Thakurani, the saintly princess daughter of Naresha Narayana (the Raja of Puntiya), she at first refused. But when Lord Jagannath, the principle deity at his temple of Jagannath at Puri, appeared to her in a dream and ordered her to initiate the king, she relented.” 6

This except verifies what you should be able to immediately glean from it: Prabhupāda can contact any of his disciples whenever he wants at any time he wants. He is a mukta-jīva. He is like Nārada Muni; indeed, he has those same powers. If he wants to come to you in a dream, that dream is no longer astral—it is spiritual. Can he today give you an order? Certainly!

Those who dispute this do not believe it are faithless, and how can such a person be a guru? Such a materialistic devotee thus ignores what Prabhupāda clearly enjoined in that all-important May, 1977 room conversation with his governing commissioners: “When I order you become guru, he becomes regular guru, that’s all.”

The purport is self-evident, and ENE presents examples. There are many more than those, but what was presented in this chapter suffices to make the point: YOU HAVE TO GET HIS ORDER in order to be an initiating spiritual master in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement, in his disciplic succession of Gaudīya Vaiṣṇavism.

It is not optional!

Of course, the institutional gurus of “ISKCON” reject this. They say that you can become guru after you wait in queue for one or two or three years and then receive G.B.C. imprimatur to be a guru in their cult. Institutional guru means bogus guru. ENE gives an example of this deviant mentality:

“Still others claim that Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda does not have to give a personal order in the flesh or in a dream for a disciple to begin initiating; he had, in his books, already given blanket orders to all of his disciples to become initiating spiritual masters. (One of these others) explained, “He has already given us the order. To the degree that we follow strictly and can explain the science of Krishna . . . to that degree we are guru. It’s not that we need some separate appointment. The appointment is in every one of his books.” 7

However, it does not actually work that way: 1) a devotee who is a Party Man in “ISKCON” cannot on his own make the determination and immediately begin initiating newcomers, although he considers that he is strictly following and does not need to receive Prabhupāda’s direct order in order to be a dīkṣā-guru, and 2) Even if some Party Man concludes that he is strictly following (and that would only be superficially) in the “ISKCON” confederation, he still needs outside help: He needs to be recommended by a senior man to some kind of guru selection committee, one which is assigned to consider guru eligibility in the massive and complex bureaucracy of that dangerous cult.

As such, whether someone buys into the rationalization (just quoted above in ENE) or another fool and deviant buys into the cult stricture of waiting in queue after first being recommended, all of that is not in accordance with Prabhupāda’s order. That order is crystal clear. If some genuine devotee receives the order to become dīkṣā-guru directly from Prabhupāda, that fortunate devotee would become unfortunate if he then kow-towed to the “ISKCON” institution and waited for a year or years in order to begin initiating disciples who approached him. He would immediately fall down by making such a compromise.

ENE then segues to the final days of Prabhupāda’s disappearance. Obviously, a whole book on this topic would be required in order to cover the event comprehensively, and ENE makes no such attempt. That is understandable and wanted. It does, however, delve into an exchange in the very last days between Prabhupāda and one of his very few favorable godbrothers, namely, B. V. Puri mahārāja. He was under the false impression that Prabhupāda appointed eleven initiating spiritual masters, and Prabhupāda attempted to disabuse him of the notion:

“‘After your demise, the institution will be nowhere. At least you must put them in line. They should have some tradition. In India, there is some tradition, but in Western countries, no tradition.’ Then he said, ‘What to do? Everything Krishna’s Will.’ And he passed away. Previous to that occasion, I asked, ‘Mahārāja, you have established eleven gurus. There is no harmony. This can be no harmony. Guru must be one. You have selected eleven gurus.’ He said, ‘I have not selected. I have appointed eleven ritviks.’”8

Still, that self-serving and false pre-supposition—that Prabhupāda had appointed eleven dīkṣā-gurus–was believed, promulgated, implemented, and enforced from July, 1977 onward. It was particularly stressed, obviously, after Prabhupāda left the scene. Even though B. V. mahārāj was told directly by Prabhupāda that he did not appoint gurus, that godbrother still said that Prabhupāda had appointed dīkṣā-gurus. So it was with everybody, because THE BIG LIE was spread and contaminated everyone like a kind of crypto-occult Ebola virus.

ENE gives a brief recap of the final day of Prabhupāda’s actual passing, along with lamentation felt by his disciples. The fourth chapter of this book then closes in the following way:

“Yet, even as Prabhupāda’s followers mourned their loss, some of his leading disciples had already begun to plan how they were going to become initiating spiritual masters themselves. Prabhupāda’s greatest fear—that after his death ‘there will be chaos’ in his Society—had begun to manifest.” 9

Prabhupāda knew well that his movement could (and would) break into factions via pseudo-spiritual tribalism. That is the case at this time. However, in the immediate aftermath of late 1977 and early 1978, the chaos that ensued was covert and of a different variety, what one prominent “ISKCON” leader called “the sole acharya system.”

Technically, there were eleven princes in their designated principalities (zones), but within each of those enclaves, its wheelhouse revolved around the sole ācārya system of governance and culture. Before this dreadful implementation surfaced, a loose planning stage was required. We shall next month analyze it threadbare for your edification and realization.

Chapter Four closes by quoting E. Burke Rochford, Jr.:

“The scholar of ISKCON and Professor of Sociology and Religion at Middlebury College in Vermont, E. Burke Rochford, Jr. explained, ‘Prabhupāda’s death . . . was a major turning point for ISKCON’s development. . . Over the next several years, ISKCON faced continuing and often bitter sources of internal conflict. Prabhupāda’s death left ISKCON with no one legitimate heir or power structure to lead the movement.’” 10

Over the next four-plus decades. The internal conflict stemmed from bad leaders inducing hatchet men, sycophants, fanatics, space cadets, kick-mees, and blind followers to accept all kinds of deviations. What has been emphasized in this month’s presentation is that, if you walk back the cat, it all had as its fulcrum the false pre-supposition that Prabhupāda appointed gurus before he departed physical manifestation.

Be assured, he never did this.

Near the end of that fateful May, 1977 room conversation with his G.B.C. men, Prabhupāda said that he would appoint some gurus. He didn’t either in May or in July, either. He only appointed rittivks. Why?

The reasons why are interrelated and two-fold: 1) No one was qualified, so he could not appoint or recognize any of his disciples to the post, either then or for the future, and 2) He changed his mind and decided not appoint gurus. He had every right to do so, and he did so.

Furthermore, there is no question that he recognized a Successor nor did he recognize eleven of them, although that parody played out for awhile.

I give Chapter Four of ENE is a straight A.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. It is all based upon eleven seeds of self-apotheosis sown into the fertile soil of Gouḍīya Mutt in the Spring of 1978. This event itself was based upon a major misconception—nothing more than a false pre-supposition without standing—that, when Prabhupāda appointed rittviks in July of 1977, he also appointed them as initiating gurus for the future after he departed.

There is no solid evidence of this. The idea that rittviks automatically become gurus has no śāstric verification. The current Rittvik movement—centrifugally divided into endlessly mutable groups and tribes—is based upon evidence so weak that it can barely be called evidence.

Similarly, the so-called evidence that Prabhupāda recognized gurus in July of 1977 in a letter that he did not even dictate—and which focused on ceremonial rittviks with Prabhupāda remaining the only initiating spiritual master of his organization—is just as weak, false, and deviant.

If you want to keep your spiritual life healthy (or to even remain sane) amidst all of this massive deviation and chaos, reject the whole kit-and-kaboodle. “ISKCON” is not bhakti-yoga nor buddhi-yoga nor seva-yoga. It is imposter yoga. It is a colorful, plastic rose. It is nothing more than a showbottle! It is colored water in a bottle advertised as medicine, but when you take it, it does not work! SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 88). Kindle;

2 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 89). Kindle;

3 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (p. 90). Kindle;

4 T.K.G. letter to a godbrother (Upānanda), dated 12-13-78;

5 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 91). Kindle Edition;

6 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 100). Kindle Edition;

7 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p 101). Kindle Edition;

8 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 102). Kindle Edition;

9 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 104). Kindle Edition;

10 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 104). Kindle Edition.


Podcast transcription (October 1, 2024): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Five by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Five of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

“Now, after the death of Pāṇḍu, there was conspiracy. Dhṛtarāṣṭra wanted that “Actually, this is my kingdom. Now, somehow or other, I could not get it. Now my brother is dead. So if I do not inherit, why not my sons?” This was the politics. Politics are always there, and enviousness, jealousy. This is the nature of this material world. You cannot avoid it. Spiritual world means just the opposite. There is no politics. There is no jealousy. There is no enviousness. That is spiritual world. And material world means politics, jealousy, diplomacy, enviousness, so many things. [1]

“I am so sorry to learn that there is a sort of conspiracy by some of our God-brothers as not to give me a place at Mayapur.” [2]

“Now by the grace of Krishna we have got sufficient properties all over the world, so there cannot be any diplomacy or conspiracy by any sane man. All these properties and opulences, whatever we have got, this will not go with me when I go away from this world. It will remain here. I am training some of my experienced disciples how to manage after my departure. So if instead of taking the training, if in my lifetime you people say I am the Lord of all I survey, that is dangerous conspiracy.” [3]

These are obviously all excerpts from His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda. Each of them has a disturbing element to it, particularly the last one. Conspiracy eventually became endemic to Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. In 1977, if you saw a picture of him, you would wonder how he was still maintaining life in that emaciated form. Of course, the overwhelming majority of devotees never saw such pictures, because the leaders knew that it was against their interest for the rank-and-file to see how debilitated Prabhupāda’s condition was.

Why? That is quite self-evident. Anyone viewing those pictures of him in the final year (and particularly, the final months and days) would conclude that he would be leaving the scene soon. Many would leave and go to India to be with him. Indeed, he did leave soon. The secrecy penchant of the vitiated G.B.C. was well-established since 1972:

“Sriman Atreya Rsi das may be very expert, but without my say he has been given so much power and this has upset my brain. I also understand that immediate actions are going to take place even prior to my permission, and that, also, ‘without divulging to the devotees(!)’

I do not follow exactly what is the motive of the so-called G.B.C. meeting, therefore I have sent the telegram which you will find attached herewith, and I have received the replies as well.

Under these circumstances, I AUTHORIZE YOU TO DISREGARD FOR THE TIME BEING ANY DECISION FROM THE G.B.C. MEN UNTIL MY FURTHER INSTRUCTION.”

This was from a letter sent to all temple presidents on April 8th, 1972, suspending the authority of the G.B.C.

For those of you who are listening only, Prabhupāda had his personal secretary type out what he said into the dictaphone on to a hard copy letter. He distinctly ordered that there be an insert of that exclamation point after: “without divulging to the devotees.” In other words, it was not inserted by your host speaker, but was in the original text of the letter. Another way of saying the same thing is that the G.B.C. penchant for secrecy deeply disturbed Prabhupāda.

We see that there was a major conspiracy back in a millennium from deep antiquity after Pāṇḍu (who was the rightful king) met his unexpected demise due to a curse from a man (in the form of a stag) that Pāṇḍu had killed. Pāṇḍu’s line of monarchical succession would be through his sons (his known sons, of course). The eldest was Yudhiṣṭhira, so he was supposed to be the rightful next king. But his nemesis, Duryodhana, in league with his father and some others, had other ideas.

Dhṛtarāṣṭra was older than Pāṇḍu, but Dhṛtarāṣṭra was born blind. The stricture was, in Vedic days, that the king or emperor had to have all of his senses in full working order. He could not be deaf or dumb or crippled or blind. It was a good rule, and it was supposed to be honored and upheld. As such, the second son, Pāṇḍu, who had all of his senses in powerful order, was eligible to become king. However, Dhṛtarāṣṭra still considered himself the king, being the eldest. And if he was king (which he was not), then, when Dhṛtarāṣṭra left the scene, the monarchical line of regal succession would have passed to his eldest son, Duryodhana.

The five Pāṇḍavas stood in the way, however. Thus, there was a conspiracy as to how to eliminate them from the monarchical succession, despite the fact that Duryodhana was managing the whole kingdom very well as the de facto (but not de jure) king, since Dhṛtarāṣṭra could not do so due to his major physical defect.

The issue here is conspiracy. The whole of the Mahābhārata is based upon that very conspiracy. We could very easily fill this month’s podcast with an explanation of the tale of that conspiracy. However, it would not be in accord with our current focus on this multi-part series. Our focus is upon the various chapters of Henry Doktorski’s most important treatise to date, viz., Eleven Naked Emperors (ENE).

We have now reached Chapter Five of his work. It is a short chapter entitled: “A Takeover Conspiracy.” Let us dig into it. You should not at all be surprised that some kind of secret conspiracy developed a bit after Prabhupāda left physical manifestation. It is the way of the world, as was pointed out in that excerpt, above-quoted.

Perhaps, a conspiracy was developing before he departed. Perhaps one really heated up just a day or two before he departed, when it appeared certain that he would do so. However, there is no question that one developed after he departed physical manifestation. ENE gets into some examples of the scuttlebutt connected to all three of these possibilities, with the last one being the only certainty.

First, however, ENE begins this chapter with a quote from Aristotle:

“The least deviation from the truth is multiplied later a thousand fold.” [4]

How super-excellent this aphorism is! That is one of the ways that māyā works. Some small deviation to begin with, getting its foot in the door. Then some adjunct related to it, usually a bit tangentially, in order to expand it. Then it grows and grows. Then it becomes accepted as the standard. Excellent aphorism to introduce the chapter.

In the beginning of this chapter, ENE goes through any number of rumors about the conspiracy that we all know had to have gone down. Obviously, there will be all kinds of opinions about it. We shall never get any verification of substance from the conspirators themselves for a number of reasons. Some of them are dead, and the rest are now old. They are dying off, and the Old Guard protects its own.

Also, aside from this, the conspirators who manipulated everything in the first place know that, if they come clean, that will not be appreciated. It would only be appreciated by a minority of devotees, such as your host speaker. The vast majority of the current many thousands of improperly initiated bhaktas and bhaktins will not only not appreciate anyone from the Old Guard revealing anything about the conspiracy to replace Prabhupāda as imitation Successors—they will want to tear anyone who does so limb from limb.

As such, although little here from the rumors (being quoted from ENE) can be considered definitive, let us analyze some examples of what is remembered (either rightly or wrongly) about how the whole debacle was formulated, how went down, when, who was involved, etc. There’s one example presented in ENE from a personal servant of Sudāma. It appears that Sudāma was approached in advance about how the conspiracy to replace Prabhupāda should best play out. This fellow’s name is Rāmacandra dās, almost certainly an initiate of Prabhupāda:

“Sudāma Prabhu revealed to me that, the day before Prabhupāda departed from us, all of the ISKCON leaders—including Satsvarupa Maharaja, the other original ISKCON gurus and other leaders—met together to discuss how to divide up the world. Sudāma Prabhu told me that Tamal Krishna Maharaja and another sannyāsī . . . approached him and said, ‘There is going to be a meeting in which we are going to divide up the world. Don’t go anywhere, you should be there.’” [5]

Yaśodananda dās and Bhakta dās validated Rāmacandra’s remembrance on the meeting just before and after Prabhupāda left the scene. Perhaps they do not agree on the timing, but they agree on the conspiracy itself. Yet, it was all based upon the false pre-supposition that, when Prabhupāda named (appointed) the rittviks, he simultaneously appointed them as initiating spiritual masters for the future.

The other leaders were led by T.K.G. to believe this, Swāmi B. R. Sridhar buttressed the pre-supposition, and it was passed down-line to the rank-and-file, accepted as an unquestionable and undeniable fact. Here is a sentence in this chapter of ENE which summarizes it:

“As far as I know, we still have the tape of Prabhupāda naming gurus to initiate on his behalf while he was with us, and then to be ‘regular gurus’ afterwards.” [6]

When it came to breaking down this conspiracy in terms of taking over the movement (as dīkṣā-gurus, which none of them were), the cutting edge or raw nerve of this loose plot would be the “who.” The beginning of Chapter Five centers upon Sudāma das, how he was approached to take part in the plan and how he wanted no part of it. Obviously, the record of how it went down, including the timing, of Sudāma’s rejection is subject to controversy. ENE discusses it in the following way on page 108:

“Sudāma’s story of the alleged take-over plot is inconsistent in at least three regards: (1) Puranjana, Ramachandra and Yasodanandan offer three different dates for this alleged conversation between Sudāma and Tamal and Bhavananda. Puranjana claims it was May 1977, Yasodanandan claims it was August 1977, and Ramachandra claims it was November 13, 1977. According to some sources, at least two other senior godbrothers besides Sudāma Maharaja (and a fourth godbrother a couple years later) were also offered the position of dīkṣā-guru by some of the ISKCON gurus, but refused: Achyutananda Swāmi and Guru Kripa Maharaja.”

Although not specifically mentioned, Akśayānanda was the temple president of the Krishna Balaram mandir. He was part of the contingent that opposed the eleven great pretenders in that first rebellion of the winter of 1979, the debate face-off between Hṛdayānanda and Pradyumna. It was abruptly brought to an end by the bellicosity of Hdayānanda. It was held at Raman Reti, but the whole thing degenerated quickly.

It would be tangential to get into any specifics about it here, but it bears mentioning that Akśayānanda was against the “new gurus,” and was part of the last-men-standing group there in India which opposed how they took over. He soon thereafter joined the mahā-maṇḍala and left “ISKCON” entirely as an incorrigible enemy.

Acyutānanda was the first devotee (at Tompkins Square Park) to dance to Prabhupāda’s drum beat. He was and remains a very special and devoted transcendentalist. He is a man of knowledge and occult experience. He is renounced and was anything but a favorite of the powerful mis-leaders absorbed in profit, adoration, distinction, and power over godbrothers and godsisters. That he is reported in ENE to have refused some kind of initial overture makes complete sense and tallies well with all of his divine proclivities and influence.

As far as Guru-Kṛpa is concerned, he was the biggest of the black sheep. Without question, he was one of Prabhupāda’s pet disciples. He was a very rough guy capable of tapasya, but also capable of physical enjoyment with the opposite sex. Some thought that his face resembled Steve McQueen, although I personally couldn’t see it.

He was a great kīrtan man. In the opinion of your host speaker, the greatest kīrtan men were Madhudviña, Guru-Kṛpa, and Hansadutta, the latter also being a great bhajan singer. Guru-Kṛpa personally told me (at that time when the zonal imposition was going down) that he was approached by T.K.G. on the subject of his (Guru-Kṛpa) becoming guru.

Although I do not remember all of the specifics of my exchange with him and his anecdote, it centered around a proposal (from T.K.G.) that Guru-Kṛpa was too controversial and too disliked by too many leaders in order to be named to the original contingent of the so-called initiating spiritual masters. He was despised by Satsvarūpa and Rūpānuga.

When T.K.G. explained to Guru-Kṛpa how the rest of the “new gurus” thought he should act in relation to their guru takeover, I do remember Guru-Kṛpa saying to me the following: “Tamal is telling me that, if I just wait a year and keep my nose clean, that I will then be named guru. Yet, although T.K.G. was supposed to be a perfect guru like Prabhupāda, he could not even see that I wasn’t even following the regulative principles when he was talking to me.”

Svarūpa Dāmodar is mentioned in Chapter Five. He was against the guru appointment scam (what we also accurately peg as the appointment conspiracy) during the 1978 G.B.C. asat sabhā in Mayapur at the Annual Meeting. He proposed a five-year waiting period before anyone initiated. His proposed resolution was voted down 22-1.

Svarūpa Dāmodar, however–and in contradiction to his brave stand in 1978–accepted an appointment to guru by vote in the very early Eighties. I have personal experience of this man in Atlanta when I was Balavanta’s personal secretary there in 1978 until May of that year.

Svarūpa Dāmodar Swāmi had a profile as a gentle sadhu, but he was quite the politician. I had direct personal experience of this. Once his five-year proposal got voted down, he went on a kind of rampage via international phone calls to others who were left out of the guru club. This included Gopal Krishna, a fellow G.B.C. of Southeast Indian birth.

I was privy to this, because Svarūpa Dāmodar’s room was katty-corner to mine on the second floor of the building at the top of the hill there on Ponce de Leon in Atlanta. I was also privy to it because Svarūpa Dāmodar left his door open. Maybe he was a friendly guy—I don’t know—but I do know that he was not at all friendly to me, and he was politicking for guru like anything at that time.

It paid off for him a few years later. He died young. It is virtually certain that he accepted uttama-adhikārī worship from his disciples once he was part of the first wave (after the eleven great pretenders) to be voted in as guru, along with Gopal Krishna and another man. That five-year waiting proposal that he submitted to his comrades at the asat sabhā may have been a disguised objection to the first wave of eleven gurus not including any Southeast Asian sannyāsīs.

ENE then goes on to briefly, and correctly, describe that the first actual schism in the movement was the Siddha-Svarūpa breakaway. Although he did not have that much influence, he was also a black sheep like Guru-Kṛpa. The difference was that Guru-Kṛpa was a member of the G.B.C. and, to some limited extent, cooperated with it. He received his commissioner zone from the governing body. Siddha-Svarūpa, a.k.a., Siddha-Svarūpānanda, proffered no such cooperation.

He despised the G.B.C.. He was a charismatic guru even before he became initiated by Prabhupāda in the early Seventies. For all practical purposes, he was doing his own thing both before and after his initiation. His stomping grounds was Hawaii and the Philippines. He had no institutional charisma, but he was loaded with personal charisma.

He was anti-Sanskrit, and he surfed regularly. He had a sweet bhajan with his own catchy tune, which no one else sung or emulated. Sometimes, he used his Western name, such as on cassettes labeled: “Chris Butler Speaks.” Guru-Kṛpa and Madhudviña loathed him.

TATTVAMASI

Just as the eleven gurus were tying up their plan, word circulated as to how it would go down. Siddha heard about it, like some of the rest of us. He wrote, had printed and had distributed the first issue of his “Haribol News” (there was no INTERNET back in the day, of course). The six-page pamphlet boldly declared that all of those new gurus would spend ten thousand years as worms in stool for what they were doing.

ENE discusses how, previous to that, Siddha attended the burial ceremony of Prabhupāda at the Krishna-Balaram mandir. He was an outcaste, but none of the major players—what to speak of the rank-and-file—was going to try to prevent him from attending. He did not want to speak, but, according to ENE, Hṛdayānanda persuaded him to do so to the assembly for the 1977 salt burial, conducted by Swāmi Nārāyan.

We shall simply point out that Siddha stated, in his brief lecture, that guru is never appointed. Guru is only by qualification, not appointment. He stated that, correctly and succinctly, that Prabhupāda didn’t appoint gurus. This was against what became the institutional propaganda.

He also made the bold statement—certainly rejected by all of the upper echelon of “ISKCON” leaders—that all of Prabhupāda’s initiated disciples were automatically, if qualified, duty-bound to be gurus in their own rite after Prabhupāda departed. This radical assertion was not made available on any basis whatsoever for obvious reasons; it was cent-per-cent against the monopoly, based on a loose conspiracy, that the vitiated G.B.C., led by T.K.G., was in the process of formulating and forming. As such, Siddha was never a part of the ISKCON scene after that.

Siddha took the title of Prabhupāda as of early 1978. This means that he declared himself the Successor in the line, although Prabhupāda never declared him as such. He was the first breakaway, unless you include and consider your host speaker, of course.

Previous to the asat sabhā of the vitiated G.B.C. in the Spring of 1978, only Kīrtanānanda acted upon what was (wrongly) considered to be the appointment of future dīkṣā-gurus in July of 1977. Everyone else had different opinions of how things should play out, so the conspiracy was anything but tight. It was in a kind of formulation stage that was basically more dormant than it was not. Satsvarūpa, for example, was opining that the new gurus should not be worshiped inside the ISKCON temples, and ENE points out that opinion, as well as some from others. Everything was in flux for awhile, but not for long.

We find the following quote from Chapter Five:

“The double issue of BTG announces eleven gurus, but . . . curiously, in the same issue, Back to Godhead published an excerpt from a conversation with Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda recorded twelve days before his passing in which he emphatically declared that he did not appoint any specific persons as successor acharyas, ‘It’s not that I’ll give an order: ‘Here is the next leader,’ Prabhupāda insisted. ‘Anyone who follows the previous leadership is a leader.’ Unfortunately, no one at the time, it seems, noted this paradox. How could Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda allegedly have appointed eleven successors and also claimed that he did not appoint any successors? In retrospect, it appears that the eleven had pulled the wool over nearly everyone’s eyes in ISKCON.” 7

It seems? Of course not! The statement by Prabhupāda (quoted in the excerpt) that he only appointed rittviks was entirely ignored and merged into oblivion. It would only have been a paradox if it had been well known and had been made well known, which it was not.

In the final days, Prabhupāda also corrected one of his younger godbrothers—when that godbrother (Puri mahārāj) said that Prabhupāda had appointed eleven gurus but should have instead simply appointed one Successor. Prabhupāda corrected him, saying that he did not appoint gurus but only rittviks. This was also not made known.

Undeniably, the eleven great pretenders had pulled the wool over everyone’s eyes, and it was quite effective. We all believed that Prabhupāda had appointed eleven spiritual masters, although he had not done so. We argued against how they set up their outrageous worship of themselves, but we did not dispute that Prabhupāda had appointed them. That was because we did not have information, and that was intentional on the part of all of the “ISKCON” leaders who benefited from the scam.

Instead, what was quibbled about was how the “non-guru godbrothers” were to relate to and view the “guru godbrothers” in terms of perspective: A completely irrelevant tangent! This side trip centered around their own disciples viewing them as absolute, while the godbrothers viewed them from a relative perspective. Or, as Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar, with another of his poisonous tropes, put it: “It is to deceive the disciple.”

ENE mentions this tangent as follows:

“Yet, each guru also had godbrothers who related to them not on the absolute platform but on the relative platform. How could this paradox be reconciled?” 8

ENE then adds:

“In addition, the eleven knew that they would not be able to see or relate to each other as absolute authorities. What would happen if they disagreed and fought with each other? How could conflicts between gurus be resolved if they were all supposed to be perfect and infallible beings? What would be the relationship between the gurus and the G.B.C., and between the gurus themselves? Each guru considered himself an autocrat and his geographic zone of influence as his personal autocracy. Yet they were also supposed to cooperate together for the propagation of the worldwide ISKCON preaching mission.” 9

“ISKCON” devised an anti-Vaiṣṇava system of roping off sectors of the world into zones run exclusively enjoyed by princes in their own principalities known, according to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar (who gave this bad advice in the first place) as “ācāryas of the zone.” This was the alleged solution to all of the potential problems that would ensue. Some of those problems were just mentioned here from Chapter Five, and I have provided that excerpt. To say that it is comprehensive is a bridge too far, but it certainly brings up many salient points of cult contention.

Each and every one of them surfaced (as did any number of others), but all were supposed to be resolved by each ācārya in his zone . . . as long as he was cooperating with the others. The issue of cooperation was made paramount, and for a brief time, it was quite effective. Everyone should cooperate with the new gurus. Everyone should cooperate with what the vitiated G.B.C. had devised as Prabhupāda’s plan for his movement: Cooperation, cooperation, cooperation!

It was bandied about constantly in the late Seventies as the be-all and end-all for everybody and everything. But was it cooperation that the zonals and their henchmen were really after? Certainly not. Instead, cooperation was the buzz word disguising the real mandate: Simply accept!

I heard it through the grapevine that, when the eleven gurus got together—and it may not have been just them but many of the governing commissioners—they discussed how the new arrangement of the zonal ācārya imposition was to be explained. Apparently, one of the new gurus asked: “How should we explain all of this?” To which Bhāvānanda is said to have replied: “Don’t explain anything: Simply tell them!”

Chapter Five goes on to discuss—in advance of when they actually went down—what the potential problems could be if the G.B.C. proceeded and divided the world into eleven fiefdoms. Obviously, this was being talked about as a possibility before was voted into kinetic existence.

ENE brought one possible chief contention:

An autocracy cannot succeed if there is more than one autocrat. Two or more will inevitably issue conflicting orders and cause chaos. Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda knew that better than anyone. If he had intended to choose a new acharya to rule ISKCON, he might have chosen only one, not eleven.” 10

This is an important point. The Machiavellian Manipulator, with effective help from B. R. Śrīdhar, bamboozled everyone into believing as fact (although it was nothing more than a pre-supposition . . . and a false one, at that) that the rittviks automatically were parlayed into full blown dīkṣā-gurus after Prabhupāda left. This got converted into the alleged fact (based upon another related and just as false pre-supposition) that Prabhupāda appointed eleven men as gurus.

Then, that got converted into those eleven men being worshiped by everyone, including their godbrothers and godsisters, as mahā-bhāgavats. And that got converted into eleven Successors. Then, because all of these mega-autocrats absorbed in self-apotheosis could not possibly get along (and not be immediately at each others’ throats), the Successor scam required each of the princes possessing their own principalities, in which they came to be known as zonal ācāryas.

Get the picture? The not-very-significant rejuvenation of the rittvik process of initiation in July of 1977 got blown up into this! Why? Well, the guru must be seen by his disciples as absolute! The guru must be seen as good as God! Or, as the Navadvipa mahant put it: “It is to deceive the disciple.” And not just improperly initiated disciples: It was to deceive everybody in or connected to their then deviated movement.

It was all a big lie. Most of this is now known. However, try to get some perspective of how outrageous the whole scam was at that time and how in the dark virtually everyone of us was . . . and not by choice!

What set all of this outrage into motion? It was primarily the dark duo of the worst men: Kīrtanānanda and T.K.G.. Do not forget that T.K.G., as the so-called caretaker to Prabhupāda, decided who could see and talk to him in the last months he was with us. Do not forget that he disallowed any sannyāsīs to seek clarification of just how the movement was to be carried on after that botched interview of late May, 1977.

However, someone had to make the first move on the chessboard in order to force the issue. That someone was, as could be expected, Kīrtanānanda. After all, T.K.G. was the epitome of a Party Man. He did not rely upon personal charisma, because he didn’t have much. He had the personal charisma of black salt. However, he had plenty of institutional charisma, and he claimed that he knew what Prabhupāda wanted.

Kīrtanānanda, like Hansadutta, had a lot of personal charisma, although quite a bit of it was, let us say, a bit on the dreadful side. In one sense, the die was cast before that fateful meeting of the asat sabhā in Mayapur at the G.B.C. Annual Conclave, because Kīrtanānanda jumped the gun and, by doing so, set a high bar. As ENE put it:

“Kīrtanānanda saw no need to hesitate, and boldly initiated his first disciples at a 1977 Christmas Day fire sacrifice at New Vrindaban, less than six weeks after Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s passing. (His) act was in defiance of his godbrothers. Whether he would be disciplined—or at least chastised—by his godbrothers three months later during the annual G.B.C. meetings of March 1978 remained to be seen.” 11

He wasn’t, and he was the eldest of the eleven. He had only inmates at his Moundsville compound. He loathed his godbrothers and held them in utter disregard. He never applied any of their decisions to his personal playground. He was the supreme there. Had anyone ever seen Kīrtanānanda pay an obeisance to any other sannyāsī?

He immediately began to take uttama-adhikārī worship, because he knew he could do it. He immediately, without consultation with any godbrothers or with the G.B.C. body, began initiating new disciples less than two months after Prabhupāda departed physical manifestion. Why? Because he knew he could do it, and he knew it well that nobody could stop him . . . or even attempt to do so.

And anyway, what did he care? He did not care if the G.B.C. decided to formally chastise him at Mayapur. By that time, his well-populated community would be functioning exactly according to plan. He would then declare himself no longer part of the “ISKCON” movement or its governing body. He would go rogue, since he already was.

And, there was at least a 50-50 chance they would follow his lead, and that’s exactly how it played out. He gambled, threw the dice, and it came up eleven. He was the leading edge, he was the man, and the others were, as he actually called them, his “ten little Indian boys.”

Chapter Five of ENE is not an essential chapter in the book. Some of the information in it could have been included in the chapters preceding and following it. Much of it discussed rumors of the conspiracy, and there were contradictions in such anecdotal evidence. There was a loose conspiracy, but exactly how it went down has merged into the annals of oblivion. It is now basically in the category of rumors only.

There is a saying in the NFL: You can only win against whatever is put in front of you. Sometimes, a team’s upcoming schedule will include three weak teams in a row as opponents. As such, the superior team racks up three wins. What could have been done about it? Those were the teams they had on the docket by the NFL schedule maker, those were the inferior teams they had to beat, and those were the teams they did beat.

What is the point of this analogy? It is this: The segue of what Chapter Five includes had to find a place in the book. Doktorski realized this, and he included, as a chapter, the research he made on all of these factors, labeling the whole thing a conspiracy. It was a loose conspiracy in the making, one which got modified significantly in the Spring of 1978.

As such, I do not grade him on the subject matter. He researched and wrote it up quite well. I shall only grade the chapter in terms of its cogency and accuracy. It meets the standard, and I give it a straight-A.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. Carnival dogs have consumed the line. The whole tragedy is a result of dishonesty combined with secrecy. Its record is quite hellish. It is also the result of blowing way, way out of proportion something (the rittvik appointments) into something that they never were and never were meant to be. It is the result of a loose conspiracy that took shape and then devastated everything.

Eleven seeds of personal ambition—the seeds of “ISKCON”– required fertile soil in which to sprout. They got that nutrient-rich mix in the immediate aftermath of Prabhupāda’s disappearance. This created the “ISKCON” movement. It is what its record says it is. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1. Excerpt from a platform lecture on July 7, 1973 in London;

2. Excerpt from a letter to a godbrother, 5-13-70;

3. Excerpt from a letter to a leading secretary, 10-8-73;

4. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement, p. 105. Kindle Edition;

5. Ibid, pp. 106-107. Kindle Edition;

6. Ibid, pp. 108-109;

7. Ibid, p. 109;

8. Ibid, p. 116;

9. Ibid, p. 117;

10. Ibid;

11. Ibid, 118.


Podcast transcription (November 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Six by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Six of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

“. . . he guides him so that he will, his life, his progress of life, may be systematic. Now, to take such guidance means the spiritual master should also be a very perfect man. Otherwise, how can he guide?” 1

“‘. . . there was a saying: Just take this garb and the dress will tell you what you have to do. . . Take the military dress and the dress will direct what you have to do, what will be your duty.’” 2

And if the band you’re in starts playing different tunes,

I’ll see you on the dark side of the Moon. 3

After the disappearance of Prabhupāda from manifest physical presence, the ISKCON movement became very bewildered. Things first got worse, then worse than that, then even worse. A mistake got compounded with two solutions which were also mistakes.

Mistaken knowledge abounded. One such egregious “mistake” is described above, to wit: Whatever dress you put on, the garb will turn you into that thing. Put on the dress of a guru, and the dress will magically turn you into a guru.

Flawed at every stage, a narrative was created, and it metastasized. The mis-leaders of their own deviated movement--in the name of Prabhupāda and ISKCON, of course—kept trying to conceal what was unraveling badly by making even more mistakes. Distress was felt everywhere, although some were anticipating a great new development in the movement with eleven heartbeats overcoming the one strong heartbeat of the Founder-Ācārya, who had departed.

This was also proven to be a naive expectation. Those who were actually following that Founder- Ācārya knew, both within and without, that his movement, led by what proved to be ambitious, contaminated leaders, had now moved to the dark side of the Moon.

Why did all of it go down? If we did deep, if we try to get to the root of that descending octave, there is only one answer to this question which completely suffices: There were no gurus in the ISKCON Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness after Prabhupāda. He left it to function on its own compromised power.

Your host speaker is analyzing the second publication of Henry Doktorski—his most important work to date—entitled Eleven Naked Emperors. As always, henceforward references to this book will be under the acronym ENE. The title of Chapter Six is “Rise of the Zonal Ācāryas.” It is a long chapter, and it is loaded.

It begins, however, with a major speed bump. You can overcome that flaw by understanding its blemish clearly. All the hell which followed what this chapter introduces can be summarized as stemming from the simple fact that, after Prabhupāda departed, there were no genuine gurus in his movement, and no one was trying to become siddha.

Nor was a genuine guru consulted.

The fact that there were no gurus in the movement after Prabhupāda combined with an irrational exuberance about and faith in the vitiated G.B.C.. The temple presidents did not emphasize becoming perfect. Everyone put too much stock into the institution, and not where it belonged: On the individual devotee utilizing the facilities of that institution in order to become a perfect man, a bona fide spiritual master. ENE touched upon this, somewhat obliquely, in the following excerpt:

“There was an amazing degree of faith in the concept that the G.B.C. were empowered and pure, that Srila Prabhupāda was going to act through them, and thus the correct and proper conclusions were going to be properly arrived at by our trusted senior godbrothers.” 4

It was not amazing. It was mind-boggling, because the G.B.C. had not produced anything of significance since the first year of its creation in 1970. Over and above this, you do not rely upon some kind of Commission in order to spread Kṛṣṇa consciousness to other conditioned souls in human form. It is spread by pure devotees who have received the order to become spiritual masters from the real Ācārya, not by the edicts or resolutions of some kind of Commission.

And now we get into the thicket of this Sixth Chapter. Doktorski cites what he considers to be fact, although there should be a red flag immediately spotted in connection with this so-called fact. He cites a Neo-Mutt 5 leader and sannyāsī of the name Bhakti Bhavan Vishnu. This fellow was (and if he is still alive) is cent-per-cent a pillar of Neo-Mutt. He was a devoted follower of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. It is virtually certain that he received his new label . . . errrrr, his current name . . . from the Navadvipa mahant, as well as his bamboo cloth staff.

As stated in ENE in an Endnote (appreciated that this was added, of course), this belief—mentioned herein as a fact--was allegedly from a room conversation with Prabhupāda in his quarters in Vṛndāvan in October, 1978. An immediate problem: He had not been manifest for eleven months previous to that date. An error? Sure, but consider that publishing such an error can be Paramātmā’s way of signaling that the whole thing, in the guise of being a fact, is actually in error.

The excerpt from ENE I am about to read was from a book by this Vishnu sannyāsī, entitled: The Hare Krishna Movement: The Post-charismatic Fate of a Religious Transplant. There is a not-so-subtle aparādha contained in that subtitle. As could only have been expected, the sannyāsī’s book was published by The Guardian of Devotion, which is cent-per-cent Neo-Mutt. This was the Neo-Mutt organization until the emergence of its World Vaishnava Foundation later on, which is it current branding.

Bottom line, ENE utilizes this flawed excerpt—flawed in more ways than one—in order to make a point (allegedly a fact) which no listener or reader of this podcast is whatsoever obliged to accept as factual. Let us proceed to that comment by the Vishnu sannyāsī:

“Despite Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s order to his disciples not to associate with his godbrothers, on more than one occasion he gave permission for them to consult with B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja. One time, shortly before he passed away, Prabhupāda instructed Tamal Krishna Goswāmi, Hansadutta Swāmi, Tripurari Swāmi and others, “In my absence, if you have any question regarding philosophy you may consult my godbrother, Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja at Navadvipa. . . On another occasion, Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda recommended to several disciples—Jayapataka, Giriraja, Tamal Krishna and Ramesvara—that after his passing they should “consult [with B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja] about philosophy and practical points.” 6

That this excerpt was included in Chapter Six is a blunder. That sannyāsī’s recollection is inserted in ENE as if it is factual. Maybe it was, maybe not. You have every reason to be skeptical about it, although it was bandied about by a select section (described subsequently) as being a real event. Let me list five solid reasons you should be skeptical about it:

1) The excerpt is a written account in a book from a dyed-in-the-wool acolyte of Neo-Mutt. It tailors to the flawed Neo-Mutt perspective, obviously Another way of saying the same thing is that there is a strong probability—if not a certainty but nothing more than a biased account;

2) There is no tape recording of this so-called meeting (and so-called order) from Prabhupāda nor is there any transcript of it to be found;

3) What is the context? If we had a tape of it, we could glean a context. If we had a transcription of it, we could glean a context. Did Prabhupāda even say or order any of these things? Surmising that it is possible (although your host speaker considers the whole thing is bunk) that he did talk about this subject, what else did he say? We cannot know, because the Vishnu sannyāsī does not provide anything except what suits his narrative, the Neo-Mutt narrative, which is flawed;

4) What about the orders Prabhupāda gave in that important letter of April 28th, 1974 where he stated: “So it is better not to mix with my godbrothers very intimately because instead of inspiring our students and disciples they may sometimes pollute them. . . We shall be very careful about them and not mix with them. This is my instruction to you all. They cannot help us in our movement, but they are very competent to harm our natural progress.” He gave similar orders on November 9, 1975 to a president in Canada: “So I have now issued orders that all my disciples should avoid all of my godbrothers. They should not have any dealings with them nor even correspondence, nor should they give them any of my books or should they purchase any of their books, neither should you visit any of their temples. Please avoid them.”

We are to disregard these clear orders in favor of accepting a diatribe from a dedicated Neo-Mutt sannyāsī? You have every reason to be skeptical;

5) Phalena-paricīyate: Judge by the results. What was the result of such close and intimate contact with Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar? What was the result of lapping up all of his bad advice? DEVASTATION to Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement, that’s what!

There is also something else you may note in connection to the references made about the supposed order of Prabhupāda to consult with Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. Everyone channeling this “order” is in one of two categories: They are either devotees of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar (who crossed the river and took sannyāsa from him, betraying allegiance to Prabhupāda’s movement in the process), or they are useful idiots from “ISKCON.”

Remember, until the Great Schism of 1982, the “ISKCON” leaders (and their loyal followers) were favorable to the man. It appeared that he was helping them in their takeover. ENE shares an example of how “this story” (as another man recollects it) was passed around as ironclad fact in “ISKCON” at that time:

“Drutakarma dasa, an associate member of the Bhaktivedanta Institute who specializes in history and philosophy of science, also heard a similar story, ‘Before leaving this world, Prabhupāda told his leading disciples that if they had questions about Vaishnava practice they could consult with Narayana Maharaja or Śrīdhar Maharaja.’ Some have tried to create a myth that Prabhupāda wanted them to be overall guides for ISKCON in his absence. . . . Prabhupāda says that his own teachings were sufficient.” 7

At least the excerpt acknowledges that Prabhupāda’s teachings were sufficient, implying—at least indirectly—that the consultation was not really needed. It surely was not! What WAS needed were men who had taken the training from Prabhupāda and had actually qualified themselves as gurus. Over and above the fact that there were no gurus, such outside consultation produced disastrous results for Prabhupāda’s branch of the line, effectively polluting and destroying it.

ENE goes on to make an astute comment about the debacle:

“Why did the G.B.C. need B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja’s advice? Hadn’t their spiritual master already told them everything they needed to know? A few months before his passing, Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda announced to his disciples, ‘So there is nothing to be said new. Whatever I have to speak, I have spoken in my books.’”8

Nicely done. However, the counter-point to this—examples of it, specifically—is still presented near the beginning of Chapter Six. That counter-point is a blemish. It is questionable whether it should have even been included, what to speak of beating its drum via testimonials. Here is a quote from another senior man loyal to the institutional delusion (at that time), and how consultation with Gouḍīya Mutt was necessary, when it very much was not at all needed:

“Srila Prabhupāda had not given them one single instruction—zero—nothing, on how to set up such a system. . . They found that they had a million questions, and Srila Prabhupāda had given them . . . not a word or a vague hint how in the hell was the whole damn thing supposed to be set up and how was it to work? The G.B.C. found themselves totally in the dark.” 9

G.B.C. totally in the dark? How could that be? These were the senior men who were Prabhupāda’s direct agents for seeing to it that his movement was managed properly by the temple presidents. They consulted with him constantly. And now it is alleged that he gave them no light, that he gave them no knowledge as to how to become guru?

This bellicose man refers to what was to be created after Prabhupāda left as “the whole damn thing.” He alleges “not even a vague hint” was given by Prabhupāda and that there was not one single instruction (“zero!” he shouts!) about how to be guru given by Prabhupāda.

Wrong on all accounts. The right conception is that his leading men did not take the training, and therefore, the training was not complete. If any man had become even a regular guru, then how to set up the aftermath of the disappearance would be easily conceptualized and carried out. Yet, as noted repeatedly here, none of them were gurus. They were in the dark for that reason. Then they took very bad advice from Gouḍīya Mutt leading to a major schism with that asāra organization in 1982.

The resentment in this excerpt is blatant. Bad attitude creates bad commentary, creating bad narrative. This narrative of Prabhupāda being—at least, indirectly—responsible for what went down after he left (on the plea that his guidance was insufficient) is gurv-aparādha. You cannot pin any of it on him. Instead, pin it on the donkeys:

HIS EVIL LEADERS!

The author of ENE is not a devotee of Prabhupāda, although he is an excellent researcher and historian of Prabhupāda’s Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. Nevertheless, this chapter is mixed. There is quite a bit of really good stuff in it later. The debacle transpired because the leaders of “ISKCON” failed to become gurus, because they failed to follow the Founder-Ācārya’s instructions . . . although they enjoyed so many perks in the name of being the best of his devotees.

“However, despite the protestations by Tamal Krishna, Satsvarupa, Harikesh, and Bhavananda, some others claim that Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda had given some instructions—instructions which they had ignored: ‘When I order, ‘You become guru,’ he becomes regular guru. That’s all.’” Prabhupāda did not instruct his disciples to become acharyas and sit on elevated thrones. When the eleven, in tandem with the vitiated G.B.C., neglected their spiritual master’s instructions and embarked on the zonal-acharya dīkṣā-guru course, they became lost in uncharted and unfamiliar waters. A catastrophic shipwreck was inevitable.” 10

Once again, nicely done. A regular guru (which none of his leaders were) is not a mahā-bhāgavat. He is not a jagat-guru. He cannot accept lavish worship from his disciples, what to speak of from godbrothers or godsisters. It was not lack of instruction from Prabhupāda as to how to be a regular guru that resulted in “the whole damn thing” going down. It was lack of obedience which produced deviation, not a paucity of instruction.

“Although Jayadvaita did not specifically say that ‘some of the new gurus feel inadequate,’ it was implied in his question. B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja responded in effect, “Just wear the uniform of the guru, and if you are sincere God will direct what you have to do.” B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja explained: ‘When the second great war broke out in Calcutta, Dalhousie Square—military dress was written on the wall, was painted on the wall, and there was a saying: Just take this garb and the dress will tell you what you have to do. Do you follow? Take the military dress and the dress will direct what you have to do, what will be your duty.’” 11

Again, remember that the “ISKCON” leaders were all favorable to the Navadvipa mahant, because he was shining their apples. He was buttering their bread by providing fertile soil in which the eleven seeds of personal ambition could sprout, blossom, flower. Were they using him? Sure, but he was also using them, although it would take time to realize this with certainty. They should have been hesitant and skeptical about him, but they were not, and everyone paid the price for that.

Here, the “ISKCON” sannyāsī explicitly repeats one of the poisonous tropes doled out by the Navadvipa mahant concerning just putting on the uniform and you become the soldier. It was quoted at the very beginning of this presentation. It is New Age philosophy. Vaiṣṇava philosophy is: First deserve, then desire, the exact opposite of the uniform trope.

The consultation propaganda is there to convince the reader that all that went down between ISKCON and Gouḍīya Mutt Navadvipa was according to Prabhupāda’s desire, which it definitely was not. And then we have this little ditty from one of the eleven glorifying Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar: “I take it that Prabhupāda is speaking to us through you.” 12

Par for the course at that time. ENE also shares how Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar formulated the Ācārya Board:

“There should be an Acharya Board to guide the whole thing from behind, without non-acharya within the meeting. Then, if anybody within the meeting, then if anybody is considered to be the most expert for the management, he will work under the Acharya Board.” 13

This was a major deviation. Because “ISKCON” had no gurus, all of its fools bought into this board within the real board. Prabhupāda would never have approved of it. The non-guru contingent (all of them were members of the non-guru contingent, actually) within the G.B.C. were supposed to be subordinate to the eleven great pretenders of the vitiated G.B.C..

TATTVAMASI

The Ācārya Board (also known as the Ācārya Standing Committee), recommended by the Navadvipa mahant as the best way for the governing body commission to make all decisions about gurus and disciples, was approved 22-1. Only Harikeśa votes against it. Then, concerning whether or not to consult him, Harikeśa made a speech and voted against going to talk with Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. Chapter Six covers Harikeśa’s account about how his speech played out. Again, he was outvoted 22-1 and also ridiculed in the process by Jayatīrtha.

All the descriptions about Harikeśa’s initial resistance in the asat sabhā of the vitiated G.B.C. in late March, 1978—including his later jumping off of his so-called Vyāsāsan in Germany while being worshiped on it and running to his room—are examples of Doktorski’s bulldog research efforts to uncover such hidden facts and incidents.

Eleven Allegedly Appointed by Prabhupāda

Prabhupāda only appointed rittviks. He did not recognize any gurus or even a regular guru. The appointment of gurus alleged to have been made by Prabhupāda was an appointment that never was. What the eleven and their co-conspirators did was to merge the rittvik appointment into a covert appointment of future dīkṣā-gurus.

It proved to be a very effective strategy. On bulletin boards throughout the international centers of the movement, it was advertised that Prabhupāda, in the summer before his passing, had specifically appointed eleven spiritual masters to succeed him. It was a big lie, but virtually none of the rank-and-file could realize that.

ENE quotes one of the influential sannyāsīs in Raman Reti, and part of that excerpt describes their subterfuge:

“If Prabhupāda had actually appointed them, Prabhupāda would have announced their appointment during his manifested presence, or they would have announced it shortly after his passing. But no, they waited four months to announce their appointments. Why? Because Prabhupāda never appointed them. During those four months (and probably even before Prabhupāda departed) they were colluding between themselves. Not the entire G.B.C.; only select members were involved in this conspiracy. It was a conspiracy of silence. They knew what they wanted to do, but they kept quiet about it until the March 1978 G.B.C. meetings.” 14

This assessment is mostly factual, but not entirely so. Satsvarūpa, as editor of the BTG, spilled the beans earlier in an editorial. He was the scribe who wrote the most on the alleged appointment of gurus. This included a position paper with this sub-header: “in consultation with higher authorities,” referring to talks with Swāmi B.R. Śrīdhar.

ENE describes that as follows:

“At the same March 1978 meetings in which the zonal-acharya system was established, the G.B.C. approved a paper by Satsvarupa dasa Goswāmi entitled ‘The Process for Carrying Out Srila Prabhupāda’s Desires for Future Initiations.’ The paper contained many ideas that came from conversations with B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja, such as how a godbrother should act in the presence of one of the new ISKCON gurus. Satsvarupa wrote, ‘The sisya will not tolerate any other Vaishnava coming to disturb the absolute position of his guru. This is the heart’s feeling or proper Vaishnava sentiment, and disciples of Srila Prabhupāda should be sensitive to this and careful not to disturb the relationship between the new gurus and their disciples. . . . You may look upon your godbrother who’s now a guru in your own way, but you must behave so that the new bhaktas’ and disciples’ faith is not disturbed. Your conception of him may be kept in the mental world, but not shown on the outside.’”14

This G.B.C. position paper rubber-stamped the appointment of eleven spiritual masters and, in the process, injected more nescience into the mix. Through the institution’s monthly magazine and G.B.C. imprimatur—along with “consultation with higher authorities”--it was turned into “ISKCON” dogma that Prabhupāda named his gurus.

Divine Successors

Next, ENE segues to the zonals allegedly becoming Successors:

“Some (if not all) of the zonal acharyas boasted (or at the very least did not contradict the erroneous belief) that they had been miraculously promoted from a lower stage of devotional service to the uttama-adhikari stage by the inconceivable power of Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda. Tamal Krishna Goswāmi claimed, ‘Prabhupāda conferred his blessings upon these [eleven] disciples, seeing that they had dedicated themselves heart and soul to assisting him in the preaching mission. Thus he considered them to be uttama-adhikari, all highly advanced devotees worthy to be accepted as spiritual masters.’” 15

It was T.K.G.’s scheme from the beginning. Remember: He is the one who wrote the letter appointing the rittviks. Prabhupāda simply signed on a line at the bottom left of it, called “Approved.” T.K.G. knew well how he could parlay that appointment of rittviks into the eventual appointment of dīkṣā-gurus, and this he did.

He did so with the help—make that, tremendous help—of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar of Navadvipa. This was a a boon for T.K.G.. Now, not only did the Navadvipa mahant back the rittviks automatically becoming spiritual masters (“rittvik-ācārya, then it becomes as good as ācārya”), T.K.G. also was encouraged to have all of them—himself obviously included—to be worshiped as mahā-bhāgavats (“mat-guru si jagat-guru”).

The pretenders certainly did praise Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar and give him all kinds of undue prominence for his poisonous advice. That was discussed in the next section of ENE:

Prominence Given to the Navadvipa Mahant

“B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja had became a highly-respected advisor in ISKCON. Zonal gurus, sannyāsīs and temple presidents visited him at his Navadvipa ashram and asked for his opinions about matters which vexed them. Puranjana noted, ‘Śrīdhar Maharaja then became the darling śikṣā guru of the ISKCON gurus and ISKCON overall. For example Satsvarupa was sending out audio tapes to all of ISKCON, where the G.B.C. were speaking with Śrīdhar. . . . Hansadutta installed huge photos of himself with Śrīdhar Maharaja in the foyer of the Berkeley temple, and anyone who doubted Śrīdhar’s authority was demonized and kicked out.’” 16

He was materially empowering them, so the eleven and their henchmen gave him prominence. It would come back to bite them not far up the road, but they were obviously quite short-sighted about that. Prabhupāda had taken mahā-bhāgavat worship as the real jagat-guru, and they looked upon the Navadvipa mahant as allegedly Prabhupāda’s śikṣā-guru. As such, they granted him prominence.

They imitated mahā-bhāgavat worship for themselves, because he told them “mat-guru si jagat-guru.” That Bengali trope carried the day, and the stricture of regular guru (which none of them were) was ignored. It was easy to ignore it, because nobody knew about it. The eleven and their co-conspirators made sure that everybody now knew about Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar, however, although he was a complete unknown previously.

Extravagant Worship

ENE describes the extravagant worship that the new gurus—supposedly Successors to Prabhupāda—were taking once they got back to their new fiefdoms as ācāryas of the zones. After all, if you are a jagat-guru, you can elect to be worshiped in that way. Prabhupāda was alleged to have recognized them in July of 1977 as being special; according to that false fact, he must have empowered them.

ENE comments upon this in summary, as follows:

“Few (or none) of the eleven it appears, including Kirtanananda as was revealed later, were firmly fixed on this basic rudimentary platform, much less on the more advanced platform of the “acharya,” who is not “an ordinary man, for he is the representative of all the demigods,” who is “non-different from Krishna.”17

Acting above your adhikāra or eligibility produces evil results in so-called spiritual life. This is a well-known principle, and, as stated earlier, that is why the accompanying principle of FIRST DESERVE, THEN DESIRE must be both honored and preserved in any genuine bhakti cult. “ISKCON” and its vitiated G.B.C. threw all of this to the winds. Sew the wind, and you reap the whirlwind in due course.

That’s exactly how it played out. They enjoyed more than any other humans on the planet, the extravagant worship and everything attached to it . . . but only for about eight years. Then, they suffered like anything, and they continue to suffer now. We should not at all sympathize with any of them for the vikarmic reactions that now they must endure.

My Way or the Highway

ENE then segues to its next sub-title, which we repeat (above) just as it was published in the book. After taking advantage of the rich and fertile soil provided to them by the Navadvipa mahant, the new gurus—now princes of their own principalities known as zones—decided that the implementation stage must be forceful. In effect, how they took over the movement was nothing more than a kind of covert brute force, i.e., a pseudo-spiritual smash-and-grab.

Here are two entries from Chapter Six that describe their mentality and the brute anti-brāminical action that accompanied it:

“Bhagavan dasa . . . the initiating guru and G.B.C. representative for France, Benelux, Italy, Israel, and co-G.B.C. for Spain and Portugal, had a straightforward and unforgiving policy in dealing with godbrothers who questioned the legitimacy of the new gurus. During an August 1978 conversation with Tamal Krishna Goswāmi in the stairwell of the guesthouse at the Krishna-Balarama Mandir in Vrindaban, Bhagavan boasted, ‘In my zone, it’s simple. It is my way or the highway.’ Tamal Krishna responded with a ‘loud laugh.’” 18

“In his book, Divine or Demoniac? Spiritual Movements and the Enemies Within, Dhanesvara dasa . . . recalled, ‘Many gurus demanded that godbrothers and sisters worship them as they had Srila Prabhupāda, and if they would not they were rejected from the Society. The new gurus, having the support of many adoring disciples, became the predominant political force, and Srila Prabhupāda’s disciples, although senior and experienced, were the odd-man out. Insubordination was dealt a heavy-hand. The policy everywhere was not one of love and cooperation, or even live-and-let-live, but my-way-or-the-highway.’” 19

The purport is self-evident.

G.B.C. Empowers Itself to Vote in New Gurus

The asat sabhā of the vitiated G.B.C. of 1978 also introduced another major deviation in relation to guru: All eleven of whom were recognized by the Commish as spiritual masters, and they constituted the Acharya Standing Committee, which was completely unauthorized. It introduced future guru by super-majority vote. ENE describes it in this way:

“The 1978 G.B.C. resolutions specified that new ISKCON gurus—in addition to the original eleven—could only be authorized by a three-fourths majority vote by the G.B.C.. One G.B.C. resolution indicated, ‘The G.B.C. will consider each year . . . the appointment of new Spiritual Masters to be approved by a 3/4 vote.’” 20

Although a deviated way to determine a genuine Vaiṣṇava spiritual master, the asat sabhā did make it very difficult to attain—at that time. Later on, this voting procedure—again, totally unauthorized—was modified substantially. ENE does not get into that in Chapter Six, however.

Back in the day (late Seventies), the minutes of its meetings were kept in semi-secrecy, so few knew of this concoction by super-majority. That’s the way the Commish wanted it. As could only have been expected, no one in 1978 was even nominated to receive that super-majority vote, and no new gurus were created in this impersonal papal voting dynamic.

Of course, those eleven impostors were created, but none of them were voted into the post. Everybody just assumed that they were gurus appointed and recognized by Prabhupāda, rubber-stamped by the Navadvipa mahant, and good to go as ācāryas of their zones. The band was playing a different tune, and no one would be able to make any progress in siddha realization by believing in or cooperating with it.

Eleven Naked Emperors

Doktorski chooses to close Chapter Six with a subtitle—The Naked Emperors--which is a slight modification of the title of his book. Always acceptable, although this technique is generally used for a chapter title rather than a subtitle. Your host speaker is quoted extensively in this final section of Chapter Six, and I choose to reproduce some of those excerpts in closing my review.

“The zonal-acharya system was a disaster waiting to happen, but few could foresee its negative effects at the time—except for Pradyumna, Guru Kripa Swāmi, Yasodanandan Swāmi, Gauridasa Pandit, Kailasa Chandra, and others . . . One last point regarding B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja must be noted: some say that he knew that Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda had appointed the eleven as ritviks, and he encouraged the eleven to become zonal acharyas: ‘Ritvik acharya, then it becomes as good as acharya.’

Kailasa-Chandra recalled: ‘Remember: None of us knew at the time how what was being received from Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar was loaded with nescience. I was, at most, only mildly suspicious of what he was spouting, and this is evidenced by the G.B.C. position paper of 1979, which still accepts Śrīdhar Maharaja as authority. Nevertheless, I specifically remember that 1978 statement, word-for-word!’” 21

Chapter Six begins with a major speed bump, which is certainly a blemish. That cannot be neglected in grading it. However, it recovers nicely. As such, it liberally grades out as a straight B.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo spiritual scam. It got over via lies, false-pre-suppositions, Gouḍīya Mutt nescience, secrecy, intimidation, and a despotic kind of smash-and-grab with a bad astral smell.

Remember this: Nothing good can come from a so-called spiritual organization that is built upon a super-structure without gurus.

SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1. Bhagavad-gītā lecture to select new students in N.Y.C., 3-2-66

2. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, pp. 130-131, Kindle Edition;

3. Pink Floyd, “The Dark Side of the Moon”;

4. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 120). Kindle Edition;

5. Although most of you know what is being cited here refers to Neo-Mutt (and what that brand means), a handful of you do not. As such, a brief explanation should serve the immediate purpose. After Prabhupāda left and chaos immediately ensued, second echelon ISKCON men lost faith in both ISKCON and its leaders. In a term used in that aftermath, they “crossed the river” in order to become acolytes (of sorts) of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar of the Gouḍīya Mutt in Navadvipa.

In effect, this created a new, Westernized (mostly, Americanized) edition of Gouḍīya Mutt representing a new organization, which was opposed to Prabhupāda (to be described when analyzing a later chapter in ENE). At first, this group—many of whom took sannyāsa from the Navadvipa mahant, was the mahā-maṇḍala and then the Guardian of Devotion (G.O.D., get it?). Their current label, which conclaves annually at Mathura in India, is now branded as the World Vaishnava Association;

6. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, pp. 121-122), Kindle Edition;

7. Ibid, pp. 122-123 (Drutakarma);

8. Ibid, p. 126;

9. Ibid, pp. 126-127 (Ameyātmā);

10. Ibid, p. 127;

11. Ibid, pp. 130-131 (Jayādvaita);

12. Ibid, p. 132 (Rameśvara);

13. Ibid, pp. 132-133;

14. Ibid, p. 140;

15. Ibid, pp. 143-144 (T.K.G.);

16. Ibid, pp. 147-148 (Purañjan);

17. Ibid, pp. 151-152;

18 Ibid, p. 154 (Thomas A. Drescher, “A Letter From Prison,” reproduced in the “Sampradaya Sun,” Jan., 2007);

19. Ibid, p. 155;

20. Ibid, p. 156;

21. Ibid, pp. 158-159.


Podcast transcription (December 1, 2024): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Seven by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Seven of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

“ . . . if there is bad boy, he can turn the whole family into ashes. Similarly, in this institution, if there is a bad disciple, he can burn the whole institution into ashes.” 1

Well, there were a number of bad boys. They did burn the ISKCON institution down with potent assistance from the imprimatur of the vitiated G.B.C. and from the Gouḍīya Mutt to do just that.

Who were they? They were as follows: Bad boy Satsvarūpa (the so-called Gurupāda), Bad Boy Hṛdayānanda (the so-called Ācāryadeva), Bad Boy Bhāvānanda (the so-called Viṣṇupāda), Bad Boy Bhagavān (the so-called Gurudeva, a.k.a. “The Sun King”), Bad Boy Hansadutta (the so-called Kṛṣṇa-kīrtan Ṭhākur), Bad Boy Harikeśa (the so-called Viṣṇupāda), Bad Boy Jayapātāka (the so-called Ācāryapāda), Bad Boy Jayatīrtha (the so-called Tīrthapāda), and Bad Boy Rameśvara, who, to his marginal credit, did not adopt one of those imitation labels.

Did I forget anybody? Well maybe I did, and maybe that was intentional. The nine bad boys just mentioned all engaged in activities of defiance against Prabhupāda’s orders, desires, and vision for his branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness. A monthly podcast could easily be dedicated to their malicious exploits (some were worse than others), but that is not what the podcast for this month will be about.

Instead, it is about the other two of the eleven great pretenders who were not mentioned, who individually (what to speak of together) were the taproots of the colossal hoax of 1978, and who, arguably, did the most damage—not only for that reason but for other reasons, also.

Those two REALLY BAD BOYS are now both dead and gone. In terms of a life expectancy for transcendentalists engaged in a controlled and austere lifestyle is expected to be, they both died young. One, a lifelong Protestant (even in the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement) died of extreme renal failure in a Catholic hospital of suburban Bombay. The aftermath of his painful death was particularly gruesome.

The other died in the middle of the night, at an inauspicious time, in the middle of nowhere in West Bengal, in a gruesome and violent car crash that literally tore his body in half (although the actual cause of death was a severe blow to the head).

These men and their misdeeds are going to be discussed in this month’s episode. Their names: Bad Boy Kīrtanānanda (the so-called Bhaktipāda) and Bad Boy Tamāl Kṛṣṇa (the so-called Gurudeva). Henceforward, this second fellow will be referred to as T.K.G..

They were raised differently, their cultural and ethnic affiliation was different, their mentalities were very different, their type and level of charisma was different, their styles differed, and their level of cooperation was non-existent. They did, however, both go along with the vitiated G.B.C. plan in the aftermath of Prabhupāda’s disappearance.

There are only three photos of them together. Two of these were group shots of all eleven pretenders surrounding a painting of Prabhupāda. Most of them were smiling in those photos, because, by that time, they all knew that they had got over and no one could stop them. As such, those pictures tell us nothing of their interrelationship.

There is one other photo of just these two men together, and that one is a picture worth a thousand words. The tension exhibited between them is quite palpable—if you have the eyes to see it. They were deeply suspicious of one another. They were clearly not friendlies. That is why there was a subtle but distinct bifurcation of the movement when the zonal ācārya scam was implemented in the late Spring of 1978.

These men were the taproots of that massive deviation. Kīrtanānanda was of Anglo-Saxon ethnicity and a rather extreme version of its accompanying religion, so those of the eleven that had that Abrahamic background subtly aligned with him. Five others (along with T.K.G.) were born in Talmudic environments, and they aligned with T.K.G.

None of this was an explicit alignment, of course. It was covert. Only a few of Prabhupāda’s disciples were able to recognize it. Technically, Satsvarūpa (of Italian ethnicity) aligned himself with both men, so he straddled the fence, so to speak. This was all in the short-term, however.

As the zonal scam broke down, it was everybody for himself as they all had to jump ship. Most of them could no longer be worshiped as the gods they weren’t. For years, they had checked many ambitious godbrothers, but, when the levee broke, they had to try to survive the growing backlash that came their way. In other words, most of them had to acquiesce and allow for the expansion of so-called gurus.

As has been the case for months, we herein continue with our series of analyzing, in chronological order, the chapters of Eleven Naked Emperors (hereinafter, ENE) by Henry Doktorski. It is his second book (of twelve), and, in the opinion of your host speaker, his best one. We have now reached Chapter Seven, entitled “Two Architects of Evil.” He is referring to Kīrtanānanda and T.K.G. and, accordingly, we shall commit our focus to these two taproots of the massive deviation of 1978.

Your host speaker is quoted extensively in Chapter Seven. That is appreciated. I do not see any reason why I should not reproduce some of those quotations even at length. After all, they were put into the book by Doktorski, because they made points he wanted to make about these two egregious imitation mahā-bhāgavats.

The Cult of Kīrtanānanda

ENE spends much font space early via Chapter Seven discussing, in some detail, Kīrtanānanda’s misdeeds and exploits in the early years of the ISKCON movement. We shall not go over those. Then, ENE presents a quote about Kīrtanānanda from the leader of the institutional reform movement of the mid-Eighties, Kīrtanānanda’s chief nemesis. 2 The major change that his nemesis sparked is called The Second Transformation or the collegiate compromise by your host speaker. However, I am in agreement with this man’s analysis of Kīrtanānanda, to wit:

“You wouldn’t envy somebody unless they also had something you wanted. You love what they have, but somehow or other you want it to be all transferred to you. And that’s what was there in Kīrtanānanda. And māyāvāda philosophy can also take this form. Prabhupāda mentions, in Nectar of Devotion, it can take the form of envy of a spiritual master, also. So that was the case. This was the first big crisis with Kīrtanānanda.” 3

ENE later quotes a February, 1987 letter by the same man to Kīrtanānanda: “Your position in New Vrindaban mirrors that of Srila Prabhupāda in ISKCON with astonishing fidelity. . . . At the same time, there were problems of excess, of overstepping the bounds of propriety. You (along with Hansadutta) were severely rebuked by Srila Prabhupāda for accepting guru-pūja. It was an offense to him. He called it ‘a premature attempt.’ . . . It indicates that your relationship to Srila Prabhupāda is not entirely on center. That might be a small thing in someone else; in a person of your stature, it is a disaster.” 4

ENE goes granular into the many deviations of, as the subtitle calls it, The Cult of Kīrtanānanda. This was before he labeled himself “Bhaktipāda,” which was just after Prabhupāda’s disappearance. ENE discusses how Kīrtanānanda disobeyed a direct order to open a center in London. Instead, he flew from India directly to New York City, where, linking up with his homosexual buddy Hayagrīva, and he preached that the devotees there should give up all the trappings of Vaiṣṇavism. This was part of his plan to de-Indianize and Westernize the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement.

For this audacity, Prabhupāda said that he should be sent back to the asylum (Bellevue) that he came from when he joined, and that . . .

“Kīrtanānanda may be eager to address in the Harvard university, but recently he has lost his link on account of disobedience.” 5

Chapter Seven describes the reason that devotees began to call him “Black Keith.” It describes how he attempted to publish Prabhupāda’s Bhagavad-gītā manuscript under his own name, but no publishers believed him when he told them he was the work’s author.

ENE also describes that Kīrtanānanda began preaching that Prabhupāda had empowered him to be the sole devotee to carry on the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement as Prabhupāda’s Successor. It also mentions that Kīrtanānanda began chanting Oṁ Namaḥ Sivaya during kīrtans.

Chapter Seven describes how Kīrtanānanda printed stationary for an organization he planned to form and incorporate, entitled FIRST UNITED CHURCH OF KRISHNA: YOUTH ORGANIZATION UNDERGROUND. In case you didn’t notice, its acronym was F-U-C-K-Y-O-U.

For all of this rascaldom and more, Kīrtanānanda and Hayagrīva were directed by Prabhupāda to either return to the temples separately and go into the kitchen to wash dishes . . . or, as an option, to go into seclusion. They fittingly chose the latter alternative.

We are not going to get into all of that. If you are interested in those details, purchase ENE and read Chapter Seven for yourself. Kīrtanānanda came back and begged forgiveness. Unfortunately for all of us (at least, in the long run) Prabhupāda granted him that with no real penance attached to it. This should not be misinterpreted to mean that I am criticizing Prabhupāda for doing so, as he took many such risks.

Some panned out, and some did not.

Once back, Kīrtanānanda arranged to have some godbrothers and godsisters worship him at his rural Moundsville compound. This deranged devotion was the first seed of what would later become an all- encompassing tyranny of the mind for those inmates. Prabhupāda had to once again intervene, and in January of 1975, he gave Kīrtanānanda a severe scolding in Hawaii, mentioned previously.

The idea that Kīrtanānanda was recognized as śikṣā-guru for newcomers was directly contradicted by Prabhupāda during that chastisement session in his quarters. One senior man, a governing body commission present there to hear it, reported that Prabhupāda told Kīrtanānanda: “I am both the dīkṣā-guru and the śikṣā-guru for all of my disciples.6

Kīrtanānanda threw down the gauntlet just after Prabhupāda departed physical manifestation. He did this by initiating new people in late December of 1977 without any approval from, or consultation with, the other governing body commissioners. He also began taking opulent worship from his own godbrothers and godsisters in the temple room on an elevated seat at his Moundsville compound. This forced the situation, and ENE quotes your host speaker concerning it:

“Kailāsa-Chandra commented on Kīrtanānanda’s audacity . . . ‘Kīrtanānanda made it clear that he was not going to be relegated to such a vaidhi-bhakti status, and the others were forced to either imitate him or excommunicate him. They chose the former.’” 7

As such, the G.B.C. has its fingerprints all over the deviation, especially after it capitulated to Kīrtanānanda. It allowed all of the other so-called gurus (who made the claim based upon being appointed as rittviks) to accept similar worship from godbrothers, godsisters, and newcomers. It all went down during the implementation stage of the zonal hoax in the late Spring of 1978. ENE also quotes your host speaker in this connection:

“Although the eleven ritvik priests certainly deserve to be held accountable for their “take over” of ISKCON in 1978, the actual responsibility belonged to the G.B.C. . . . The G.B.C. could have stopped the eleven from taking over, but they did not.”

Kailāsa-Chandra noted, ‘If you walk back the cat . . . in the late Seventies, the responsibility for all the current hell in the so-called Krishna conscious movement falls squarely on the Governing Body Commission. . . . The eleven great pretenders did not actually impose the zonal acharya deviation; it was the G.B.C. that imposed it. It would have never even gotten traction without the G.B.C. imprimatur. . . . As the rituals within the movement changed, so did its ideals.

The G.B.C. was benefiting from this descent into the black hole of a shadow society, so it went unchecked. Prabhupāda was converted into a figurehead, and new leaders were replacing him . . . The whole debacle traces back to massive G.B.C. deviation. It traces back to its presumption of dominance that was never a part of the charter authorizing it.’” 8

ENE then quotes your host speaker about what should have been done if Kīrtanānanda and his “ten little Indian boys” had taken a more humble approach and acted as madhyam-adhikārī regular gurus:

“Almost all of the leading secretaries and (from what I have heard through the grapevine all of the contingent that would soon become eleven rittviks) attended that crucial room conversation with Srila Prabhupāda on May 28, 1977. All the important G.B.C. men knew that it was important, and they all knew that one or two (Tamāl Krishna and Satsvarūpa were selected) had to broach the difficult and touchy subject of how initiations were to continue after Srila Prabhupāda departed.

Srila Prabhupāda answered that difficult question: ‘Regular guru, that’s all. He becomes disciple of my disciple, that’s it.’ Everything is there. I was the first devotee to comment that the adjective “regular” refers to the noun “regulation.” Ravindra immediately responded favorably when I wrote this to him in 1985, but all of those men (Ravindra probably was not in Vrindaban in May, 1977) should have recognized this correlation as soon as Prabhupāda uttered the term “regular guru.”

The uttama is a liberated acharya, but the madhyama can still serve in the capacity of a dīkṣā-guru, as long as he has received the order to do so from the liberated Acharya. This is how genuine sannyasis carry on the line. A madhyama-adhikārī is qualified to be a regular guru. As such, he is conversant with the science of God. This stage of the science—the existence of a regular guru and the platform which he is thus on (if and/or when he becomes a dīkṣā-guru)—is part of being conversant in the devotional science related to the stages of atmarama.

It is not an advanced realization, i.e., you do not have to be expert in the science (uttama) to know and realize it. If the eleven (hypothetically eleven—the number is arbitrary) had been steady in self-realization, had thus been madhyama-adhikārīs, and were ordered—specifically and personally—to be regular gurus, they would have only paid a courtesy visit to Swami B. R. Sridhar. They would have seen immediately the dangerous flaws in his recommendations in so many ways, including “acharyas of the zone.” They would not have adopted any of them.

They would have, alternatively and individually (also, quite possibly, collectively), declared that Prabhupāda had recognized them as gurus and ordered them to initiate. His Divine Grace might well have done that (for some or all of them) before he departed. They would not have created zones for initiating disciples. They would possess Vaishnava humility. They would have taken the standard lecture seats available at each ISKCON temple, and they would have made disciples by the power of their preaching (personal charisma)—not via institutional mandate or institutional charisma.

Madhyama-adhikārī dīkṣā gurus do not compete with one another for disciples and resources nor do they rely upon governing bodies in order to become approved institutional gurus. They are far beyond these kinds of anarthas. Most importantly, they would have made sure that the G.B.C. functioned as a watchdog, i.e., as soon as any initiate of Prabhupāda declared that he was initiating disciples and/or began initiating disciples, a committee of learned brahmins would have traveled to his preaching center(s) in order to make sure that he was representing the philosophy and the process rightly.” 9

However, by jumping the gun, it was Kīrtanānanda who most effectively prevented anything bona fide being legislated at the G.B.C. asat sabhā conclave in late March of 1978. Of course, none of the eleven were madhyams, so that has to be figured into the equation of judgment. This man did so much damage, and much of it has proven to be irreversible.

TATTVAMASI

Kīrtanānanda was the oldest of the lot, he was personally charismatic, and he had dedicated followers. He misused that for aggrandizement to the detriment of the movement. Of the eleven, he was one of the two taproots. It was a dark diad. These two ambitious architects of the zonal ācārya scam were the sources of the conversion of the movement in 1978.

The poison is personal ambition.” 10

Now, let us segue to that other dreadful taproot of the “ISKCON” movement of the late Seventies. Kīrtanānanda was obviously loaded with personal ambition, but there was another leader who was, arguably, even more ambitious. And that is, of course . . .

The Machiavellian Manipulator

An “ISKCON” pseudo-spiritual creeper, an imitation weed, eventually strangled the real creeper. It did so via its leaders which benefited from it. It had eleven prominent ones in the late Seventies–the great pretender zonal ācāryas—and it had one prominent leader in the mid-Eighties when The Second Transformation was ushered in. It has a different set of leaders now. The coin of its realm is has always been narcissism.

All eleven of those pretender mahā-bhāgavats were narcissists, but two of them were mega-narcissists. Those two are discussed prominently in Chapter Seven of ENE. That narcissistic coin of the “ISKCON” realm had two sides: Personal charisma and institutional charisma, the latter being Charisma of the Party Man.

Personally, I did not find Kīrtanānanda attractive whatsoever; he repulsed me. His neanderthal lectures were delivered to simply grind down the audience via his patented “we know nothing” tactic. His face was ugly; when smiling, it revealed horrific teeth. Nevertheless, I can understand why hundreds of devotees were enthralled by him, because he did have personal charisma. He took the air out of the room when he entered it, and that was always by design combined with his mega-narcissism.

He was clearly—and, for all practical purposes, totally–on that side of the coin of “ISKCON,” the one which represented personal charisma. Then we come to T.K.G.. He was on the opposite side. This should not be misinterpreted to mean that he was not self-centered. He was just as self-centered as any of Ocean’s Eleven. However, he utilized a manipulative expertise combined with institutional representation in order to coerce devotees to bend to his influence.

He considered himself to be the Moon of Prabhupāda’s movement. He was already angling—like some of the other eleven—to become the Successor in the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement . . . even before Prabhupāda departed manifest physical manifestation. ENE describes it as follows:

“Actually, Tamāl Krishna had a long history of wanting to be Prabhupāda’s successor, years even before Prabhupāda passed away. Naranarayana dasa Vishvakarma was initiated in San Francisco in September 1968 and knew Tamāl Krishna (who was initiated in August 1968) from the early days of the movement. . . Naranarayana described Tamāl Krishna’s all-consuming “manic fervor” to become Prabhupāda’s successor: ‘I knew Tamāl extremely well from the very early days of the movement onward. . . . From the very beginning, he wanted to be Srila Prabhupāda’s only guru successor. . . . Tamāl took me aside in 1969, and said, ‘Srila Prabhupāda has said that there are many stars, but I want a moon!’ Tamāl said to me with manic fervor: “I am that moon!’

The problem is that Srila Prabhupāda never recognized Tamāl as any sort of moon, and Tamāl could not reconcile his own self-perception with the idea that Srila Prabhupāda certainly did not see him as his sole successor as acharya after Srila Prabhupāda.’” 11

T.K.G. was eventually given sannyāsa and a G.B.C. post. He had proved himself, in the short-term, by effectively organizing magazine collection and distribution in California. He was appointed as the G.B.C. for India, but he did not endear himself to the other leaders already established there. He wanted to completely control them, but this was not within the jurisdiction of his power or assignment. He was to simply to oversee, witness, and report, but that is not how it was playing out. He especially alienated a couple of sannyāsīs, itinerant preachers, and even more than them, the president of the Bombay center:

“G.B.C. does not mean to control a center. G.B.C. means to see that the activities of a center go on nicely. I do not know why Tamāla is exercising his absolute authority. That is not the business of G.B.C.. The president, treasurer and secretary are responsible for managing the center. G.B.C. is to see that things are going nicely but not to exert absolute authority. That is not in the power of G.B.C.. Tamāla should not do like that. The G.B.C. men cannot impose anything on the men of a center without consulting all of the G.B.C. members first. A G.B.C. member cannot go beyond the jurisdiction of his power.” 12

Your host speaker had no dealings with the so-called “Bhaktipāda,” either before or after he adopted that concocted label. I did have some direct and indirect contact with T.K.G., however. Not very much, and none of it went well. I did not like him. He picked up on that, and, even previous to doing so, he was wary of me.

He called me “very intelligent,” but that was a far as anything favorable was spoken or acted upon by him in relation to me. He certainly disliked me, and intrigue and treachery were part of that mix. I shall not get into all of it (there really was not that much), but I shall share a few nasty nuggets with you here.

I briefly spoke with him and his chief loyal lieutenant at Govinda’s Honolulu restaurant sometime in late 1975 or early 1976. That brief meeting at his dining table was full of tension. Very unpleasant, but just a taste of what was to come! He harassed me while Prabhupāda was giving a platform lecture after the Janmāstamī parade down Fifth Avenue in N.Y.C., and he singled me out while subtly doing so.

In early 1977, he linked up with comrade Jayatīrtha. Knowing of the man’s deviations, they both corralled a sannyāsī I was working under with that leverage (of his theft and intoxication coverts) in order to force him to jettison me from his party.

I had led it successfully, and gotten under Jayatirtha’s skin while doing so. As such, I got bushwhacked. I learned about this betrayal that had me summarily dismissed by that clown sannyāsī later through the grapevine. It caused me severe distress at the time and accompanying illness, so much so that I barely had enough strength to get out of India.

When T.K.G. wanted to make your life miserable, he found a way to do so. That ominous black birthmark near his temple was not there for nothing, let me tell you. If you were in a lower echelon and did not admire him to his satisfaction, he made sure that you paid for it. Another irritable thing about him: It seemed like every second sentence he uttered began with the words: “You should.” He wanted to control everyone he met, at least, those who was not part of the upper echelon.

Another anecdote: In the late Spring of 1979, I introduced a pet disciple of Prabhupada’s, a sannyāsa at the time, to Mitralal Gupta in a suburb of Varanasi. This elderly Hindu was the most famous and expert palmist in India. The three of us were talking in the foyer of his opulent house, and the sannyāsī wanted to show him a picture of Prabhupāda. As Providence would have it, he had a BTG with a color photo, more or less a double head shot of Prabhupāda with T.K.G. next to one another.

He showed the picture to Gupta. The palmist’s head snapped back as soon as he saw it! He was aghast! There was a hesitation, then Mitralal said: “How could your guru associate with such a demoniac man?” As a side note, T.K.G.’s black birthmark was prominent in that picture.

Now, let us see what Chapter Seven offers us in terms of information, factoids, and knowledge of and about The Machiavellian Manipulator:

“Is it possible that Tamāl Krishna’s unfulfilled ambition to become Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda’s successor became such a heavy psychological burden that it eventually manifested itself in emotional angst, anger and ultimately madness? As Karandhar indicated to Ameyatma, ‘Tamāl Krishna is mad.’ In a candid moment of honest self-reflection two years later, Tamāl Krishna himself admitted, ‘When I was temple president in Los Angeles, I used to beat the hell out of people. That’s why I was the king of the heap there.’” 13

Please note: This is but another example of Doktorski’s granular research which reveals information that, without his great effort, only a handful of devotees would come to know. As we move toward the end of Chapter Seven, ENE discusses the poison issue and T.K.G.’s in the center of that controversy. There is substantial evidence that Prabhupāda was indeed poisoned by an inner coterie of his leading men and their sycophants. Indeed, there is a smoking gun, which was his statement made just a month before he departed: “Someone has poisoned me.”

I am against Rittvik. It has, in most of its presentations, aligned itself with the poison issue. It has done so, in many cases, by comparing Iesos Kristos with Prabhupāda. Note that I do believe Prabhupāda was poisoned and that T.K.G. was integral to that diabolical act. However, I intentionally avoid getting into the issue, although I have studied all of the evidence and arguments in excruciating detail. I tend to avoid it, because Rittvik has attached the crucifixion to the poisoning, which is outrageous.

As such, we shall move on to latter entries:

“ . . . Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda’s leading disciples (in no small measure due to Tamāl Krishna himself) disobeyed their spiritual master’s orders and, within a few short years, chaos erupted within ISKCON and threatened to split the Society. In hindsight, it appears that Tamāl Krishna (perhaps in collaboration with Kīrtanānanda Swami, as evidenced by Tamāl Krishna’s 1978 conversation with Gauridasa Pandit in Vrindaban mentioned earlier) masterminded the conspiracy to: (1) suppress Prabhupāda’s discussions regarding the installation of “regular gurus” . . . in ISKCON, and (2) promote the erroneous idea that Prabhupāda had appointed eleven men to become uttama-adhikārī dīkṣā-guru zonal acharyas after his passing.” 14

There might have been some collaboration between T.K.G. and Kīrtanānanda, but I doubt it. As far as Gauridās is concerned, to a significant degree he brought in the Rittvik heresy; as such, no one should take anything he says seriously. What has just been quoted encapsulates the devastating influence of T.K.G. on the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement. That diabolical man planned the whole thing; he was able to manifest his self-serving ambitions through the deviation he engineered.

However, as Hansadutta said to me on the front porch of Mt. Kailāsa in Lake County, California in early 1988: “We went way too far, and we couldn’t pull it off.” An honest perspective. And, by the way and for the record, Hansadutta was utterly contemptuous of T.K.G. and considered him a complete phony. No disagreement here from me, be assured.

“Most of the eleven may have been unaware of Tamāl Krishna Goswami’s deception, which he apparently kept only to himself. The other ritviks might have actually believed that Prabhupāda had appointed them to serve as uttama-adhikārī dīkṣā gurus after his passing. We should note, however, that none of the eleven refused their so-called appointments as uttama-adhikārī dīkṣā-guru zonal acharyas. But thinking that they had, by the grace of Prabhupāda, advanced to the perfect stage of uttama-adhikārī. Was that not far-fetched?” 14

All of Ocean’s Eleven were bad boys. However, without the influence of Kīrtanānanda and T.K.G., the zonal ācārya scam might not have gone down. Remember: They jumped from rittviks then to dīkṣā-gurus then to uttamas and then to Successors in a very short span of time, almost immediately. It was outrageous, but Kīrtanānanda set the tone and T.K.G. provided the explanation which satisfied the Party Men.

With the help of Swami B. R. Śrīdhar, virtually everyone in the movement was bamboozled by them. The other nine could not have even attempted such a devastating scam without the leadership provided by the two taproots of tyranny. They were the baddest of the Bad Boys, and Prabhupāda’s movement was thrown into an irreversible descent into one deviated transformation after another.

One final anecdote will now be shared. Be prepared: Your hair may stand on end after you hear this one and your skin may crawl. In January of 1978, on my twenty-seventh birthday, I had an intense discussion with the G.B.C. for the Southeast zone of America. It took place just outside the ofice he had bestowed upon me (although, I also slept there) in the building at the top of the Ponce de Leon complex in Atlanta.

The discussion centered around the intrigue, treachery, and betrayal that I had undergone at the hands of one of the temple presidents in his zone. What I had undergone (and how I had effectively responded to it) had led me to be gifted that private office. What I am going to reveal here should not be misinterpreted to be any kind of knock against him. Of the ISKCON leaders, he was, by far, the most favorable to me. We are not close, but I am grateful to him and still feel a mild liking of him.

Basically, in this private talk, he was trying to persuade me to move toward some kind of “realization” that he believed I should graduate to–in terms of how the movement was run. He was one of its top echelon leaders, so he should have known. Prabhupāda had even predicted that he would become President in America one day.

Like myself, he was not willing to worship any of the zonal ācāryas, which made him and I exceptions to the rule. The statement he made to me on that memorable day is seared into my brain. It cannot be forgotten under any circumstances. I shall now share it with you word-for-word, advising you not to whatsoever assimilate it as a judgment of that commissioner but rather as to the dreadful influence of T.K.G.:

This movement is run Machiavellian.
Tamāl Kṛṣṇa introduced it, and Prabhupāda approved it.”

In conclusion, I found one minor discrepancy in Chapter Seven. However, it was only mentioned as a suggestion and not as a factual; as such, it deserves to be dismissed. Chapter Seven is flawless. It deserves an A-plus, and that is the grade that I give to it.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. It did not just happen. It was made to happen, and the two taproots of tyranny were its chief formulators. They will be mentioned briefly as footnotes in the coming anthology of this movement many decades from now. They will not be mentioned at all favorably, be assured.

The era of the Bad Boys, the zonal ācārya epoch, lasted for less than a decade. It was The First Transformation, and it was a horror show! It was completely unauthorized.

It was replaced by a kinder and gentler—but, nevertheless, just as deviated—Second Transformation. We are now past that one, also, but we are not past the root deviations that were and remain the foundation of the original hoax. And those two rascals, Kīrtanānanda and T.K.G., were integral to concocting that hoax and permanently placing it at the foundation of a sahajiyā movement built on sand. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 Letter to leading secretary, 8-25-70;

2 Ravindra Svarupa dasa Adhikari;

3 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 169). Kindle Edition;

4 Ibid, p. 175;

5 Letter to senior leader of ISKCON, 10-6-67;

6 Ramesvara;

7 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 161). Kindle Edition;

8 Ibid, pp. 184-185;

9 Ibid, pp. 182-184;

10 Letter to Satyabhama, 11-1-70;

11 Op. Cit., pp. 188-189;

12 Letter to the president of the Bombay center, 8-12-71;

13 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors (p. 193). Kindle Edition;

14 Ibid, pp. 196-97;

15 Ibid, p. 198;


Podcast transcription (January 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Eight by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Eight of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

There are perspectives you need in order to really conceptualize and assimilate what went down in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Krishna movement after he departed physical manifestation. You will not get any of these perspectives from the “ISKCON” movement, nor can either Neo-Mutt or Rittvik help you to attain them. These perspectives crystallize understanding of the actual narrative of the saga in accurate context leading to further progress in genuine spiritual life.

The history of anything, big or small, is generally based upon the interplay of powerful personalities in conjunction to events. We would certainly find this to be the case in the history of the Western world just prior to the colonization of America by European citizens. Just to give one example of many, the Peace of Westphalia was a major event that has ramifications and repercussions effective to this day everywhere in the West. It created a new paradigm, but how many people are even aware of this event?

Of course, our study here in almost entirely focused upon the Hare Krishna movement, and all of us could name and acknowledge any number of major and important events in its timeline: Prabhupāda’s arrival, the establishment of his first center, his first initiations, the incorporation of ISKCON, the Columbus standing lecture and kirtan, the creation of the Governing Body Commission, etc.

Yet, there were events—both during his presence and the aftermath—that were just as important but are unrecognized today as being such. The aborted attempt to centralize his movement (the centralization scheme) by eight of the G.B.C. in 1972 would be one such example. We have discussed it repeatedly over the decades in our articles, videos, and podcasts. As such, we have not allowed it to major into oblivion.

It was not, for all practical purposes, even known about by any but a handful of leading secretaries when it went down and what it was on the verge of accomplishing (if Prabhupāda had not—in very forceful terms—aborted it before it could gain real traction) been disastrous. Almost entirely, it became known to the rank-and-file well after Prabhupāda had already left the scene, but the secretaries and the temple presidents knew about it in April of 1972 when it was nipped. They kept it secret.

This is a good example of what I shall be communicating to you today. I shall be discussing an event of major importance that went down in Raman Reti, India at the Krishna Balaram center in the first weeks of 1979. Many of you do not know of it, but that will not remain the case now. Of those of you know about it as an event, but little otherwise, that will also change when you finish assimilating this month’s podcast. Be assured: Virtually none of the rank-and-file in today’s “ISKCON” know about it. You will soon understand why that must be the case.

As far as Neo-Mutt and Rittvik are concerned, most of their followers—and even some of their leaders—do not know about it, what to speak of its actual repercussions in terms of historical cause and effective. However, despite its relative anonymity, you cannot put the pieces of the puzzle of the narrative together without knowing this event: What went down, why, what was the antecedent leading up to it, and, most importantly, what it ACTUALLY accomplished, you must know.

It led to today’s Rise of the Independents that many of you are taking advantage of, but could not otherwise do so. In other words, because, whether you acknowledge it or not, today’s general freedom in Krishna consciousness is dependent upon that event.

We continue with our chapter-by-chapter analysis of Henry Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors (hereinafter, ENE), and we have now reached Chapter Eight, entitled “Crushing the Opposition.” Succinct and accurate title. Let us say that this chapter had not been included. Let us postulate that the book had skipped this almost unknown event and went straight to the effective rebellion of the North American temple presidents in their toppling of the zonal ācāryas–and all of that obscene worship and power falsely bestowed upon them. Would anyone have noticed?

Hardly anybody knows about the subject of Chapter Eight, but everyone in or out of “ISKCON” knows the history of the presidents’ rebellion and the installation of The Second Transformation, led by Ravīndra Svarūpa (yes, he was a temple president), a.k.a., the Collegiate Compromise. The relative obscurity of what preceded it and led to it has not been skipped by ENE, however. Now you are going to receive even more specifics about this event, allowing you to understand the repercussions and ramifications that it spawned.

Before we get into all of those specifics (many, but not all, of them covered by Chapter Eight) an important—nay, essential—point must be made and assimilated by the listeners and readers of this month’s podcast. In a nutshell, it is this: You must acknowledge and realize that confronting the leadership of any cult—and we only deal with Krishna cults here—is not the same as attacking Krishna consciousness itself. A confrontation can be an attack, granted, but it is not necessarily so. In the case of the event in the winter of 1979 in Raman Reti at the Krishna-Balaram mandir, the eleven zonals were attacked. They were confronted for the first time by a handful of their godbrothers, which can be called the opposition for the sake of the excellent title chosen by Doktorski for Chapter Eight.

They were punished in different ways for that so-called attack. They were cursed. The vast majority of them were forced to humiliate themselves and publicly apologize to the “new gurus” in front of the assembly. As a side note, your host speaker (and three others, of thirty-six) did not humiliate himself and apologize. There was nothing to apologize for, and I did not do so. This made my life very tough as far as the so-called Krishna movement was concerned, obviously, and I was singled out in the G.B.C. Resolutions of 1979 for allegedly promulgating “poisonous activities.”

The zonals fully deserved to be confronted, or if you prefer, attacked. They actually had no legitimate basis for what they had done and what they were doing in the late Seventies. They had successfully hijacked the movement by taking over the vitiated G.B.C. and dovetailed its imprimatur to rubber stamp their so-called appointment. It was an appointment that never was. Prabhupāda only appointed eleven rittviks in the second week of July, 1977 in a written notice to all temple presidents.

That was no big deal. In point of fact, he did not even dictate the one-page document. It was drawn up by T.K.G. who, intent to include his close buddy Bhavananda as one of the eleven, had to hear Prabhupāda check him by also adding Hansadutta, who T.K.G. abhorred. Of course, that sentiment was mutual, but there was no clause in the document stating that these rittviks would then automatically become dīkṣā-gurus after Prabhupāda departed physical manifestation.

Yet, T.K.G. was confident that this is what he could pull off when that time inevitably came, even sooner than most expected. It was T.K.G.’s document as his initial effort to manipulate the rittviks into dīkṣā-gurus. Prabhupāda merely signed it on a line labeled “Approved.” T.K.G. was the person who actually signed it since it was his letter.

However, no one knew this. It is even somewhat debatable that the other ten rittviks knew that Prabhupāda never appointed any of them as dīkṣā-gurus. It is possible (if not probable) that they believed the hype that Prabhupāda appointed gurus in July of 1977, what to speak of the inarguable fact that everyone else in the movement believed it. Actually, it was not even a question of belief; it was an accepted fact movement-wide. But it was not a fact: IT WAS A BIG LIE.

As such, the document which was issued to confront these so-called ācāryas in the winter of 1979 at Raman Reti conceded that they were all appointed as dīkṣā-gurus, despite the fact that none of them were appointed by Prabhupāda to the post. That this error was contained in the confrontation paper should be understood in that context. Nevertheless, it weakened it, because presentation had to be mistake-free in order for it to be fully potent.

T.K.G. basically chose not to speak during the confrontation, which was divided into two sessions by an unnecessary lunch break. Something as important as it was supposed to be, but T.K.G. insisted during the session that it be so divided so that everyone—especially, it is presumed, the enjoyer “new gurus”–could relish some “lunch prasādam.” The other time he spoke was when he bellyached about Pradyumna announcing to the assembly that he was leaving it. When T.K.G. whines, let me tell you, it is the most disgusting, nauseating, and agitating sound made by man! “Pradyumna, I have traveled thousands of miles for this, and now you are leaving to attend to your Deities?”

Although Pradyumna did not, and does not, have a warrior bone in his body, he can be adamant once he makes up his mind. And he was. Despite the bellyaching, he was justified to leave, and he made the decision. The word “decision” comes from the Latin root decere, which means “to cut.” When you make a decision, you cut off any and all options which are not part of it. Hṛdayānanda had decided to play the EMOTE AND DEGRADE card in his debate with Pradyumna. Hṛdayānanda was losing the debate, and you could feel the consternation of the zonals in that atmosphere of faithlessness and opposition.

He picked up on it and decided to throw down. A very proud man, he knew he could overlord Pradyumna emotionally, because Pradyumna was strong intellectually but had no real following and was fully brahminical. Hṛdayānanda decided that the debate should degenerate into conflict, and that was that.

Pradyumna had no chance once the parameters of the debate—which was not a debate anymore when Hṛdayānanda emoted—had radically changed into a kind of rancor. “Who cares about the Rāmanuja sampradaya? Are you saying that you know more than us? Are you saying that Prabhupāda’s selected men, his gurus, are to be subordinate to you?”

This may not be exactly the word-for-word translation according to my memory, but it is close to it. As such, Pradyumna gave up on them, and he also gave up in the confrontation. No one else could take his place. Yaśodanandan could not do so. He had been Guru-Kṛpā’s wingman for years, and he was no match for Hṛdayānanda. Debate was not within the wheelhouse of his expertise. Guru-Kṛpā had completely failed to show. He could of went toe-for-toe with any of them (including Hṛdayānanda), but instead, he was in Western Europe getting incarcerated at a Netherlands penitentiary for drug-dealing.

After all, he was the G.B.C. for the Krishna-Balaram mandir. He was the one who earlier the previous year had successfully confronted both Bhagavān and Bhāvananda when they demanded the inmates there worship them. Guru-Kṛpā said no.

He said no to big seats. He said no to foot worship. He said no to any kind of special worship. He rejected the pomp and circumstance of the zonal ācārya takeover, and he could confront with the best that any of the so-called zonal ācāryas could offer.

But, he didn’t. He left it to Yaśodanandan, who did not have Guru-Kṛpā’s confrontation skills. Nor was Yaśoda an abrasive personality. He was a pukka-sannyāsī, while Guru-Kṛpā was anything but. The man of the hour should have been Guru-Kṛpā, but he turned out to be an epic fail when push came to shove. Once Pradyumna defied all of them and left the asat-sabhā, Yaśoda was no match, Akśayānanda was no match, and Johnny-come-lately Jagad-Guru was no match to the bellicosity that many of the eleven then unleashed. The rout was on.

ENE describes all of this in Chapter Eight, so let us now segue to some of those excerpts. Your host speaker, as was the case in Chapter Seven, is quoted also in Chapter Eight, but none of those will be reproduced.

“Finally, Yaśodanandan Swami challenged the zonal acharyas to a debate at the February 1979 G.B.C. meetings in Vrindaban, India. Kailasa-Chandra dasa, who was regarded as a philosophical pundit, was asked to write a position paper for the challengers. Two years earlier in 1977, Kailasa-Chandra had served as the personal secretary for Balavanta dasa, an aspiring politician and president of the Atlanta temple. Kailasa-Chandra recalled, ‘It was there that I was privy to the politics that was going down amongst the power players just prior to, and just after, the implementation of the zonal acharya scam.’

In preparation for the debate, the Vrindaban temple president, Aksayananda, gave Kailasa-Chandra a typewriter and a room at the Krishna-Balarama Mandir. When Kailasa-Chandra completed his twenty-page paper, Yaśodanandan Swami, who was respected for his strict sadhana, canvassed thirty-six devotees to sign it. The paper was copied and presented to the zonal acharyas prior to the debate. Ravindra Svarupa confirmed, ‘In 1979 questions about the gurus’ position had burst out in major eruptions at ISKCON centres at Vrindaban and Juhu Beach, ejecting over the rest of the movement thick fascicles of photocopied papers.’

Although Yaśodanandan had issued the challenge to debate the new gurus, and Kailasa-Chandra had written their position paper, it was Pradyumna—a scholar whose knowledge of logic and shastra was formidable—who was chosen to be the spokesman for the reform party. All eleven new gurus showed up for the Vrindaban debate. The atmosphere was tense.

The chief points of contention by the reformers were: 1) The new gurus were not entitled to accept worship from their godbrothers and/or godsisters; 2) Any worship of the new gurus should be held in some kind of private quarters, not in front of the deities in a temple established by Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda; 3) The worship of the new gurus was far too lavish, and they did not deserve to accept such worship whatsoever;

4) To perpetuate the line of ISKCON, the current arrangement for the disciplic succession (by the G.B.C., which was dominated by the Acharya Board) was a counter-productive concoction, and had to be immediately reversed before it was too late; 5) There were other godbrothers who deserved to be able to initiate new disciples into Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda’s branch of the disciplic succession, and some kind of accommodation needed to be made.

The strategy of the reform group relied, in great measure, on the presentation of Pradyumna, who would represent them in the debate. They also relied upon the confrontation remaining civil and conducted in brahminical fashion but, unfortunately for the reformers, the debate was not conducted this way, except during the first ten minutes.”

Of course, the author of ENE was not present for this meeting, and I was only present for the first half of it. The first half was immeasurably more important then what went down after the lunch break, as that was nothing but an apology-fest.

Only males at Krishna-Balaram were approached for their signatures. All of the male devotees residing at the complex signed it, except for Rūpa-Vilāsa. He, on the contrary, made substantial efforts to undermine its initiative. I could go into minute detail about all of that intrigue but, for now, I am choosing not to do so.

Treachery and betrayal at the Raman Reti complex preceded the arrival of the zonals. Such was not just in relation to a suggestion (adopted briefly, then reversed) made by Rūpa-Vilāsa. It also took place at Bombay, where T.K.G. turned Girirāj around from a pillar of the opposition aligned with Yaśoda and Pradyumna to a loyalist with Ocean’s Eleven. That was not known until the meeting ensued, however.

TATTVAMASI

As far as the Raman-Reti treachery was concerned, Yaśodanandan (then Swāmi) resorted to a sickness ploy in order to gain sympathy and rejuvenate all the local signatories (who Rūpa-Vilāsa had turned) on the position paper. I never wavered nor did the men who were part of my team at that time. Most of the others did. Of course, Yaśoda could not convince Rūpa-Vilāsa to sign it, and he reported all that went down to Satsvarūpa upon his arrival at the complex, probably the first to reach there.

Yaśoda had sent a friendly, one of the signers, to find me in Varanasi in January, 1979. The message the young man carried was a request to meet with him at Raman Reti and discuss how to confront this situation going down worldwide in the form of the zonal ācārya takeover.

I was willing to oblige. Yaśodanandan got approval to set me up in my own room. I banged away at the document for hours each day, and, on most days, Yaśoda would come to my room and read what I had typed. He agreed with virtually all of my writing and proposals. There was little to negotiate. We were of the same intelligence, and he took particular delight in the format that I had employed.

His secretary then typed up the formal document, although she expressed her unhappiness in receiving that assignment. Yaśoda got all of the initial signatures. I signed the document as the fifteenth signature. Pradyumna did not sign it. He read it. He told me that he liked it, but in case it had a flaw somewhere (it had two of them), he did not want to risk that being exploited by the zonals in order to take away his assignment from Prabhupāda to continue the translation of the bhāgavatam.

Turns out, that went down anyway. They punished him for having the audacity to confront Hṛdayānanda in debate. And, as it turned out, the G.B.C. took away Pradyumna’s seva and gave it to that very man, Hṛdayānanda. That tells you, in one sense, all you need to know about the ethics of those eleven men. It was the ethics of the savage.

I was pounced upon by Jayatīrtha at the very end of the first session of the meeting. The stampede was on by that time, and it would increase exponentially (from reports that I heard about it) during the second session after the frivolous lunch break. However, I noticed something just as things were breaking down in the first session.

Two of the zonals (only one of which spoke) were not approving how the other nine were crushing of the opposition. Harikeśa spoke up about it, imploring the other men to listen to the points being made, i.e., that there was validity to many of them. Hansadutta did not speak, but his facial and bodily gestures conveyed quite a bit. It was clear that he was intuitively picking up that this was the beginning of the end. He was picking up that, despite all of this going down in Prabhupāda’s quarters of the complex, that His Divine Grace did not at all approve of how the opposition was being treated.

Hansadutta’s dread of the situation proved to be justified in the long run. The position paper was not perfect, but it deserved a completely different response. The opposition deserved to be respected. Yet, Paramātmā wanted more. He wanted the zonals to be destroyed, but it would take time. This was the first crack in the dam, but that would not be recognized until the summer of 1980, when the second crack emerged (and yes, I was later heavily involved in widening that crack, as well).

Paramātmā recognized the two flaws in the opposition’s position paper. One has already been mentioned: The concession (which never should have been made) that Ocean’s Eleven had been appointed by Prabhupāda as dīkṣā-gurus. We have already covered this one adequately. Everyone in the room that fateful day believed it, although T.K.G. knew very well that it was not true. T.K.G. knew that Prabhupāda had only appointed eleven rittviks, not gurus.

The position paper granted them all guru status, and Paramātmā was not satisfied with that. The appointment that never was would first be exposed in the summer of 1980, but time had not yet changed that major misconception. The second flaw in the document was urging the eleven zonals to once again go to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar for advice. Were the fourteen points made by the plaintiffs bona fide? Should they be given due consideration? Everyone—or most everyone—was still bamboozled by the Navadvipa Mahant in February of 1979.

He was still considered, very wrongly, to be an elder godbrother of Prabhupāda who was his well-wisher. Most definitely, that was not the case, but no one recognized that harsh fact at the time. As such, the position paper advocated a resort for more bad advice that should have never been even suggested. The opposition was punished for doing so by being wiped out . . . with myself also being scapegoated by Jayatirtha just before the lunch break.

ENE continued in Chapter Eight:

“The eleven revealed, by their behavior during the debate, that they were most likely not on the topmost uttama-adhikari platform of spiritual development as they claimed. In a Srimad-bhagavatam purport written a few years later (There is this entry): ‘Being puffed up by his own ceremonial worship, . . . a kanistha-adhikari cannot imagine that anyone is more pious or religious than he, and he is not even aware that other devotees are more advanced. Thus he cannot understand the madhyama or uttama standard of devotional service, and sometimes, because of his false pride, he criticizes the more advanced devotees of the Lord, neglects them or simply has no understanding of their exalted position as preachers or completely self-realized souls.’”2

Actually, the eleven great pretenders were far from neophytes. They were all sahajiyās by the time that confrontation rolled around. They were all taking undeserved worship in front of open Deities on elevated, imitation Vyāsāsans. They were all accepting mahā-bhāgavat adulation from not only their improperly initiated disciples, but also from their own godbrothers and godsisters.

The position paper pointed out this discrepancy, and that fact deeply irritated them. This was because their delusion was so great that they had actually forgotten that, in the beginning, they all intentionally decided to imitate Prabhupāda, which is completely forbidden. They had bought into the so-called legitimacy of their showbottle imitation and, under the influence of mahā-moha, they believed themselves to be pure devotees.

ENE shared then this anecdote:

“In the end, Guru Kripa, Pradyumna, Yaśodanandan, Kailasa-Chandra, and a number of others who challenged the zonal acharyas in Vrindaban, India, all left or were forced out of ISKCON. Guru Kripa explained, ‘Most people [including ISKCON devotees] are basically sudras who want a master to tell them what to do. They do not have sufficient intelligence, or spiritual knowledge, therefore they accepted [what the zonal acharyas demanded]; and the more realized devotees left, after trying to correct things. They were told to leave because they were disturbing the faith of the new disciples. Because they could not take it any more, they left.’”

This was the developing situation at that time. You could argue that 1979 was the peak of the power of the zonals. No reform was at all likely, because the centers had been stacked with improperly initiated disciples. The godbrothers who accepted the new arrangement were allowed to stay, but the command and control was now shifting to new people. The zonals simply wanted to travel and enjoy all the luxuries made ever-ready to them. They parlayed all the work and promulgation activities off to their favorable godbrothers in the beginning. Still, the zonals knew that, on the whole, they could never really and fully trust them. By 1979, the newcomers were becoming influential and sometime soon would even become temple presidents.

This was addressed to a significant degree in the position paper, of course. The non-guru G.B.C.s were on islands. They had virtually no followers. The new people followed their gurus, and the temple presidents did not remain so if they were not cent-per-cent also kowtowing. The temple presidents who did not have, as their G.B.C. a guru-G.B.C., placed their allegiance in the guru of the zone, not in the G.B.C. zone.

As such, with all the territory of the world now carved up into eleven zones, the G.B.C. zones were nothing more than anachronisms that overlapped guru zones but were otherwise meaningless.

The G.B.C. of any such zone—the non-guru G.B.C.—had to go along to get along. He was hoping for guru expansion, of course, but in 1979 there were no such prospects. With the guru contingent, led by the aggressive pseudo-debating style of Hṛdayānanda, effectively crushing the opposition at Raman Reti in early 1979, prospects for non-guru G.B.C.s becoming appointed to guru-dumb looked bleak. Whose territory would any such new ācārya have given to him? Ocean’s Eleven all wanted to keep the share that they already had stolen via vitiated G.B.C. imprimatur. None would be willing to give up a slice of their own pie.

However, time changes things. There would be falldowns. Even previous to that, their would be in-house punishments of zonals who went too far, stretched the rubber band, and felt it snap in ways that embarrassed the remaining big guns. The power of the institution would creep back in, as it was always lurking underneath the whole facade anyway.

This was not at all apparent during the 1979 confrontation at Raman Reti, however. That was an exaltation of the greatness—so-called greatness, of course—of the glorified pretenders. ENE describes it as follows:

“Tamal Krishna, along with the other ten, falsely depicted the doubters to be little more than ‘malicious barking’ dogs. He explained, ‘Since the disappearance of our beloved spiritual master, . . . disenchanted persons come forward trying to cast doubt on the legacy left by Srila Prabhupāda. When Srila Prabhupāda appointed from among his senior disciples eleven persons to continue the process of initiation, and when after their spiritual master’s departure those whom he selected assumed their duties by his command, the critics began to bark their discontent.

Though they leveled their remarks against the successor gurus, in reality their criticism was aimed at Srila Prabhupāda himself. . . . The critics may argue that appointment alone is not a guarantee that one has actually achieved this perfectional stage of life; Prabhupāda might have appointed disciples for lack of anyone better, or hoping that they might one day achieve the desired realization. To such irresponsible criticism we answer a decisive ‘NO!’ Srila Prabhupāda chose them because they merited his confidence.’”3

Such a rascal hypocrite T.K.G. was! As we pointed out last month, he (along with Kīrtanānanda) were the evil taproots primarily responsible for destroying Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Krishna movement in late 1977 and throughout 1978. T.K.G. did not know it at the time, but the other gurus and the rest of the G.B.C. were about to come down on him. However, in February, 1979, he was flying high but soon to be shot down. He was soon to receive his first punishment, but that is another story for another time. We must stick with the immediate meanings, ramifications, and repercussions of the fateful confrontation at Raman Reti.

As already pointed out, although not all of the eleven great pretenders may have known it by that time (they all would soon come to know it, as would the rest of the movement), none of them had been recognized, selected, or appointed as dīkṣā-gurus. Ocean’s Eleven had only been appointed rittviks. There was no transitive device authorized by Prabhupāda to automatically convert them into full-fledged gurus.

T.K.G. knew this. He concocted and engineered that device, which was one of his own creation. He did so in advance. He planned it from the second week of July, 1977, and it worked like a charm. It got further empowered when the Navadvipa mahant made a similar statement backing the concept in the Spring of 1978.

Just see the hypocrisy! He knows what the actual fact is, but he claims the exact opposite in his “barking dogs” spiel. He knew that Prabhupāda never selected any of them to be gurus, yet he intentionally claims otherwise. Then, adding injury to insult, he throws in the line about all of them being Successors and not merely appointed to give initiation as madhyams (which was not the case either, because they were all sahajiyās causing only damage to the Krishna movement).

T.K.G. alleges that these so-called Successors merited Prabhupāda’s confidence, and that is why he specifically and intentionally selected all of them to be his Successors. T.K.G. knew it that everyone would buy into this propaganda, although a handful of malcontents (he tags them as barking dogs) would not. This was the attitude.

The points raised by the opposition were valid. They should have been considered, but Paramātmā did not allow any such reasonable dealing. Pride cometh before the fall. They were all going to be exposed, and the zonal debacle would crash and burn by the mid-Eighties.

As pointed out earlier, with (amongst the “ISKCON” leaders) Hansadutta being the only exception, none of them could foresee that eventual outcome at the time. T.K.G.’s rant represented where most of them were at. They were triumphalists in the winter of 1979. Hṛdayānanda had led them to a major yet ultimately phyrric victory. He was rewarded by the stealing Pradyumna’s seva and giving it to him, the great debater of rancor. Not all of the signatories apologized, but most of them did.

We have pointed out one flaw in this chapter, yet something else must be again considered. It deserves reiteration. Doktorski could have skipped this episode entirely, and the vast majority of his readers of ENE would have been blissfully unaware of it.

He did not skip it, however, nor did he merely mention it in a couple of paragraphs in the next or previous chapters. He dedicated a whole chapter to it. He thus put the incident on and for the record. It would not merge into oblivion. This was and remains yeoman’s service to the cause of the accurate historical narrative of Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Krishna movement of Krishna consciousness.

As such, I give Chapter Eight a straight-A grade for that alone.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. Evil men took over after Prabhupāda’s departure. He gave them numerous chances to rectify themselves voluntarily, but none of that took. The training was far from complete. None of the eleven great pretenders were genuine gurus and none of their disciples were or are genuinely initiated.

The world is now flooded with hundreds of bogus gurus and improperly initiated disciples posing as advanced bhaktas when they are no such thing. The final chance for rectification went down in Raman Reti in the winter of 1979. It was rejected, and the result is one transformation after another. They showed their true colors at that asat sabhā in Prabhuapda’s quarters that fateful day, and you can read all about it in Chapter Eight of ENE. I highly recommend that you do so. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987) (pp. 210-211). Kindle Edition.

2 Ibid, p. 161, Kindle Edition;

3 Ibid, p. 161-162;

4 Ibid, p. 163;


Podcast transcription (February 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Nine by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Nine of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

Aside from its institutional absurdity, a previously bona fide and powerful branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of the Gaudiya sampradāya was converted into a hypocritical illusion–full of pretension, conflict, and maleficence–in the Spring of 1978. The conversion was for the benefit of eleven men and their sycophants. Those eleven, who took de facto control of the institution’s wavering governing body, captured the movement. Each prince imitated a mahā-bhāgavat, and they divided the world into eleven principalities as their individual jurisdictions.

These were called guru zones, and the princes became known as zonal ācāryas. In that devolving process, they became self-appointed so-called spiritual masters, heralding themselves as Successors to His Diving Grace A. C. Swāmi Prabhupāda. He had departed physical manifestation just months previous to this mutiny by his leading secretaries, who had hijacked the movement, imitated him, and betrayed him.

During the all-too brief time that he guided it (1966-77), Prabhupāda, the Founder-Ācārya of that branch of this Caitanya movement, had empowered it to become the most influential international representation of the disciplic succession in Vaiṣṇava history. Our podcast is going to focus upon the dissolution of that zonal ācārya scam during the eight years that it was operative. It is going to discuss how the conversion of Prabhupāda’s organization invalidated the movement, how it converted that international organization into the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation, and how all of its bogus gurus created only improperly initiated disciples.

It will concisely analyze the negative ramifications and repercussions of the hijackers, the leading secretaries who engineered the movement’s takeover via vitiated governing body imprimatur in the Spring of 1978. However, all of this will be summarized and discussed briefly. Near its end, the chief point of this month’s podcast will be to communicate the reasons of how and why the zonals cratered in less than a decade.

Materially speaking, there was no obvious or tangible reason why they should have done so. Nevertheless, the debacle did. What did and does that mean both then and now? Is there a silver lining to its fall? Even though the zonal deviation was replaced in the mid-Eighties by but another transformation, is there something to still glean from that epic fail which is spiritually positive? All of this will be analyzed so that you can understand the actual narrative of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement.

As most of you know who have followed my podcast for the last half year or longer, this month’s presentation is also a continuation of our multi-part series analyzing and reviewing (mostly, favorably) a book by Henry Doktorski entitled Eleven Naked Emperors. As always, we shall refer to the book by its acronym: ENE.

We have now reached Chapter Nine. The title of Chapter Nine is: “ISKCON Gurus Begin to Deviate.” To some degree, this title is a bit misleading. There is no need to fault-find the title but to simply mention—and Doktorski is in full agreement with this fact—that the deviations by the unauthorized zonals began well before the events discussed in this particular chapter.

Perhaps a more accurate title would have been: “ISKCON Gurus Begin to Deviate Egregiously.” Last month, we discussed a major confrontation of the zonals in early February, 1979 at Prabhupāda’s headquarters in Raman Reti, India. The zonals emerged from it having crushed, ruthlessly and unscrupulously, the devotees who had brought up legitimate points of contention related to Ocean’s Eleven’s gross and astral smash and grab of Prabhupāda’s movement.

The zonals wound up finally taking over in Vṛndāvan, also. This gave them a full steam of triumphalist fervor, and that overconfidence foreshadowed what would soon come to pass in their movement. It is first described in Chapter Nine of ENE. There were subsequently shocking deviations manifested amongst many of princes, culminating in the cratering of the zonal ācārya scam in the mid-Eighties.

Let us now see how ENE opens this chapter:

“Afflicted by pride and ambition, a few of the ISKCON gurus began falling with alarming rapidity. As early as 1980, it was no secret in ISKCON that some of the new “uttama-adhikari” gurus, after hardly two years in business, had deviated from Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s standards and teachings. Although the G.B.C. was concerned about the erratic behavior of several of the initiating gurus, they never-the-less believed that the dīkṣā guru zonal-acharya system they had established after Prabhupāda’s passing was legitimate.” 1

This is, on the whole, a good entry. However, it lends itself to an inaccurate interpretation if your understanding of guru is not adequate. None of those men were gurus. In that sense, they were already fallen. The falldowns spoken of in this excerpt are of the egregious category. Almost all of them are connected to ācara, or behavior. This is referenced when ENE includes “erratic behavior” in the excerpt. They deviated from Prabhupāda’s instructions more than they deviated from his teachings.

Of course, by creating a sahajiyā arrangement, their teachings on who is and is not a spiritual master were severely flawed. The guru must be a very perfect man. None of those eleven counterfeits met the bill. However, the falldowns discussed in Chapter Nine are going to center around ācara or standards of behavior for bona fide gurus.

We now proceed to the next excerpt from Chapter Nine:

“The entire zonal acharya dispensation, however, according to some, deviated from Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s standards and teachings. First, at the March 1978 meetings, the G.B.C. incorrectly assumed that the eleven ritvik acharyas had been appointed as diksha gurus by Prabhupāda. Second, the G.B.C. resolved that future gurus could be elected by a three-fourths vote by the G.B.C.. On March 19, 1978, the G.B.C. resolved, ‘The G.B.C. will consider each year at Gaura-Purnima the appointment of new Spiritual Masters to be approved by a 3/4 vote. However, for 1978, no new Spiritual Masters shall be appointed other than the eleven selected by Srila Prabhupāda.’” 2

Certainly, the zonal concoction was a major deviation in and of itself. You cannot wall off gurus into zones. Any genuine guru must be both allowed and encouraged to meet his future disciple by the Will of Providence anywhere in the world. Zonal principalities would never be even slightly countenanced by any bona fide spiritual master.

And then we come to determining guru by vote. That is completely condemned. Godbrothers do not elevate other godbrothers to the post of guru by vote. It is patent nonsense. Even at the madhyam level, the guru is determined by the śakti of his own charisma and preaching.

Institutional guru means bogus guru. A guru determined by an ecclesiastical body via vote is an institutional guru. As such, if half of the vitiated G.B.C. (at that time, in the late Seventies) votes to recognize one of their own as guru, he lacks that three-quarters margin, so cannot be guru. However, if that candidate is able to recruit about five more or so of his comrades to vote in favor of him, then with the three-quarters mandate being reached, he is voted in by the Board to become a bona fide spiritual master? The whole thing is politics!

The opening section of Chapter Nine continues as follows:

“Some claim that a guru appointed by a three-quarter majority vote of an ecclesiastical body—in other words, an ecclesiastical guru —was condemned by Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda, who cited a verse by Jiva Goswāmi—a Medieval Gaudiya-Vaishnava saint, philosopher, prolific author, and one of the six great followers of Sri Chaitanya Mahaprabhu—in this regard: ‘It is imperative that a serious person accept a bona fide spiritual master in terms of the shastric injunctions. Sri Jiva Goswāmi advises that one not accept a spiritual master in terms of hereditary or customary social and ecclesiastical conventions. One should simply try to find a genuinely qualified spiritual master for actual advancement in spiritual understanding.’” 3

ISKCON was converted into “ISKCON” when Ocean’s Eleven hijacked the movement in the Spring of 1978, utilizing vitiated G.B.C. imprimatur in order to carry out that mutiny. “ISKCON,” both then and now, is the glove, and the vitiated G.B.C. is the hand within that glove.

The G.B.C. was obviously an ecclesiastical body at that time. It thus, by a combination of its voting resolutions (which tended to change every two years or so)–along with the lie that Prabhupāda appointed eleven specific disciples dīkṣā-gurus in the summer of 1977–created institutional gurus, or, if you prefer, ecclesiastical gurus.

However, this is condemned in that statement from Jīva Gosvāmī. It should be clear to everyone by now that the vitiated G.B.C. was doing its own thing—completely independent of the Founder who was allegedly its guru—as well as independent of scripture and standard Vaiṣṇava tradition for determining guru and disciple.

ENE then gets into the history of three specific zonals and their shocking activities in the aftermath of being appointed spiritual masters by the vitiated G.B.C. The chapter does an outstanding job of describing the egregious foibles of those three men, as well as giving some background info. Their exploits in their zones rocked the “ISKCON” movement in many ways, and it was forced to engage in damage control.

What this meant practically was that the G.B.C. was superior to the guru or spiritual master. That was controversial for obvious reasons, especially since the eleven pretenders had established the Ācārya Board within the G.B.C. during its first conclave after Prabhupāda’s disappearance.

Establishing that Board within a Board was urged by Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar, who gave the leaders of “ISKCON” much bad advice in order to ruin Prabhupāda’s movement from within. This was accomplished very quickly. Indeed, once the vitiated G.B.C. recognized eleven unqualified and unauthorized men to be zonal ācāryas and to be worshiped as mahā-bhāgavats, the movement was destroyed. It no longer was a conduit for deliverance from saṁsara via the guru-paramparā, because it had broken its connection to the Gaudīya Vaiṣṇava guru-paramparā.

The Ācārya Board exacerbated all of that, obviously. It allowed the eleven men to act independently of G.B.C. resolutions. However, in one sense, the G.B.C. resolutions had no spiritual sequence, so it really did not matter. Of course, the G.B.C. and its loyalists—which, by the late Seventies and early Eighties, still constituted the majority of Prabhupāda’s initiated disciples—thought that everything connected to G.B.C. resolutions and mandates still mattered . . . and mattered greatly.

None of it mattered anymore once the major deviation went down, but the majority of devotees did not recognize this. Please note, your host speaker was not part of that majority, and I did recognize something was profoundly wrong very early on.

The zonal ācārya imposition was The First Transformation. Three men created localized havoc via personal scandal in their zones of power after that Raman Reti confrontation. This lit a fuse for reform, but a guru is not supposed to be subject to reform. He is supposed to be a very perfect man. Their scandals created this major conundrum.

Although much of what then flushed out had commenced even before 1980, it was not known movement-wide. The three most badly behaved so-called gurus were Jayatīrtha, Hansadutta, and T.K.G.. ENE describes all their exploits in detail. However, I see no need to get into any of that or to reproduce those excerpts.

Instead I wish, later in the presentation, to pursue an in-depth analysis of deeper subjects related to the hijacking of Prabhupāda’s movement by the eleven imitation mahā-bhāgavats. In doing so, I want to present an overview of The First Transformation. It must be comprehensive but not dependent upon the sordid details of the puss, which triggered, admittedly, the major backlash. That backlash could not be ignored at a certain point, and a Second Transformation ensued.

There were built-in contradictions in the G.B.C. making this attempt, which was only partially successful. In other words, the effort to rein in three men who had gone rogue (to such an extent that it was becoming obvious to everyone movement-wide), backfired . . . after initially accomplishing its purposes.

It especially backfired with Jayatīrtha. He crossed the river and joined the camp of Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. That Goudiya leader had voiced strong objection to the “ISKCON” governing body taking action against what he considered to be Prabhupāda’s designated gurus. This objection was based upon the principle that guru cannot be disciplined by non-guru. True as far as that goes, of course.

However, it was not applicable to any of what was going down in the early Eighties relative to G.B.C. disciplinary action. The gurus were all bogus gurus. The vitiated G.B.C. was just as bogus, because it initially gave them its imprimatur in setting the whole thing up, including dividing the world into eleven playgrounds for its enjoying princes.

The world was being flooded with bogus Vaiṣṇava gurus and their improperly initiated disciples by the early Eighties. Scandals became, slowly and surely, known to an ever-increasing number of the congregation. Reform thus entered the picture, but reform actually had no place in meaningful rectification. Only a major overhaul, a revolution entailing a return to square one, could have any meaning. The devotees at large did not recognize this fact, and the saga continued unabated, although a cry for change was in the air.

A big part of that was a major change in attitude relative to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. The G.B.C. decided that he was the root cause of their problems in their movement. He was supposedly an elderly, laid back, well-wisher who gave advice and direction in 1978, but now the scheme that he assisted in creating—although the vitiated G.B.C. was responsible directly for its creation—was falling apart.

I am not going to say that the leaders of “ISKCON” were justified in deciding to make Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar its scapegoat. That may have been their intention, but such a ploy was never going to work. They went all-in with him, and they are fully responsible for what went down after they did so. The whole debacle was an institutional delusion, with the vitiated G.B.C., as a body, primarily responsible for the initial transformation. Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar contributed to it, that’s all.

ENE then mentions how “ISKCON” decided to scapegoat the Swāmi. The following excerpt if found on page 173 of the Kindle edition of ENE:

“The G.B.C. condemned B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja for meddling in ISKCON’s affairs. Puranjana dasa, recalled, ‘In 1982 especially, Satsvarupa, Tamal Krishna, Jayapataka, Bhavananda, Kirtanananda, Harikesh Swāmis and other prominent G.B.C.s all began to denounce Śrīdhar Maharaja as a dangerous, unauthorized, even insidious deviant. Bhavananda Swāmi, for example, began to openly lecture, ‘It is better to eat hamburgers than to listen to Śrīdhar Maharaja.’ Kirtanananda Swāmi, Jayapataka Swāmi and other G.B.C.s even visited Śrīdhar in Mayapur and insulted him viciously. Then a huge, practically unanimous G.B.C. chorus began howling, ‘Srila Prabhupāda never trusted Śrīdhar Maharaja, he is poison,’ and so on.” We should note that this sudden accusation came from the very same people who had gone to B. R. Śrīdhar Maharaja to get their new guruship certified in 1978, claiming that he was a trusted authority, etc.’”

TATTVAMASI

One major contradiction was thus revealed, and word of it spread. The Great Schism between “ISKCON” and Goudiya Mutt was its resultant. These superficial causes produced another contradiction: What was the status of those initiated by gurus who were excommunicated (Jayatīrtha) or, as in the case of both Hansadutta and T.K.G., were suspended and had their zones taken away from them?

Were their new people still initiated? Could someone initiated by a former institutional guru (who was then rejected by the vitiated G.B.C.) still remain in “ISKCON”? Could he still be considered viable for expanding brahminical activity in the cult?

Relying upon an obscure comment from recent Bengali lore, a solution the vitiated G.B.C. came up was implemented: It became known as “re-initiation.” There was a rationalization which preceded it, but that card from the bottom of the “ISKCON” deck was not pulled out. The rationalization was that any and all initiations performed by its approved gurus (post-Prabhupāda) were only legitimate due to “ISKCON” itself, not due to the status of its recognized gurus.

All such newcomers were thus allegedly initiated by “ISKCON.” Their link to the guru-paramparā was established by “ISKCON,” not by any of its agents or rent-ācāryas in the form of ecclesiastical gurus. Despite the high-flying era of the great pretenders, this hidden and underlying factor of institutional control now reared up from its subterranean influence. It had always been there. It had never went away. It was suppressed by the narcissism of Ocean’s Eleven, but some of them were becoming degraded by egregious falldowns, triggering its re-emergence.

This idea (that the newcomers were initiated by “ISKCON,” combined with so-called re-initiation), was time-serving damage control. It had not been previously preached or even mentioned. It was not part of the guru-disciple contract. It was never spoken about or explained by any of the gurus who performed initiation ceremonies in “ISKCON” post-Prabhupāda. It was unprecedented. It had no basis except for one remote quote by a relatively unknown Bengali pandit.

ENE quoted your host speaker in connection to my view of re-initiation:

“Eventually, ISKCON leaders recognized the dangers inherent in re-initiation, and some concluded that the disciples of fallen gurus were still connected to the sampradaya because they were linked to the paramparā by ISKCON. Kailasa-Chandra explained, ‘. . . some kind of better ‘adjustment’ had to be made, otherwise most of these newcomers would leave and/or join the Neo-Gaudiya Math. At least one commissioner began to advocate that these newcomers were still linked to the paramparā even if their dīkṣā guru was no longer considered bona fide by the cult. The rationale for this was that they were initially linked to the paramparā through ‘ISKCON’ and not through their guru.

Taking this concoction one obvious step further, since it was (and remains) an undisputed fact that ‘ISKCON’ was controlled by the Governing Body, the sanction of the Governing Body, in the form of its approval of its initiation process, confirmed that these newly-initiated devotees were initially connected to the sampradaya by the sanction of the process itself. This, of course, would also mean that any neophyte devotee could give initiation, since the ‘sanction of the process itself’ would be sufficient.’” 5

As has already been mentioned, unlike Jayatīrtha, Hansadutta and T.K.G. were only suspended. They could no longer initiate. Their zones were taken over by other “ISKCON” leaders. They were called “spiritually sick” in order to placate their disciples. They were sent into limbo.

This was anathema to both of them, but they had engaged in utterly unacceptable behavior which triggered this reaction. Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar did not approve of the governing body disciplining what he considered to be Prabhupāda’s selected men for spiritual master. However, like almost everybody else, he did not know that they were never selected as guru by Prabhupāda: They were only appointed as rittviks.

Unlike almost everyone else, however, T.K.G. and Hansadutta knew. They thus had a potent trump card to play. They were in a position to upend the whole “ISKCON” apple cart and invalidate all of the post-1977 initiations—and the so-called gurus who performed them—in one fell swoop. T.K.G., with Hansadutta present and having introduced him to the assembly, decided to play that trump card. This went down at what was known as the Pyramid House Talks in the first week of December, 1980.

It turned out to be a negotiating tactic, but the other devotees at that assembly did not know that it would be only used as leverage. Basically, it forced the vitiated G.B.C. to re-admit those two suspended gurus to the spiritual master fold, because here is what T.K.G. revealed:

“(T.K.G.) actually said, ‘Prabhupāda never appointed any gurus.’ Tamal Krishna explained: ‘Actually, Prabhupāda never appointed any gurus. He didn’t appoint eleven gurus. He appointed eleven ritviks. He never appointed them gurus. Myself and the other G.B.C. have done the greatest disservice to this movement the last three years because we interpreted the appointment of ritviks as the appointment of gurus.

What actually happened, I’ll explain. I explained it, but the interpretation is wrong. What actually happened was that Prabhupāda mentioned that he might be appointing some ritviks, so the G.B.C. met for various reasons and they went to Prabhupāda—five or six of us. We asked him, ‘Srila Prabhupāda, after your departure, if we accept disciples, whose disciples will they be, your disciples or mine?’ Later on there was a piled-up list for people to get initiated, and it was jammed-up. I said, ‘Srila Prabhupāda, you once mentioned about ritviks. I don’t know what to do. We don’t want to approach you, but there’s hundreds of devotees named, and I’m just holding all the letters. I don’t know what you want to do.’

So Prabhupāda said, ‘All right. I will appoint so many,’ and he started to name them and he did name them. He made it very clear that they are his disciples. At that point, it was very clear in my mind that they were his disciples. Later on . . . I asked him, . . . ‘Srila Prabhupāda, is this all or do you want to add more?’

He said, ‘As is necessary, others may be added.’ Now I understand that what he did was very clear. He was physically incapable of performing the function of initiation physically; therefore, he appointed officiating priests to initiate on his behalf. He appointed eleven and he said very clearly, ‘Whoever is nearest, he can initiate.’

This is a very important point, because when it comes to initiating , . . it isn’t whoever is nearest, it’s wherever your heart goes. Who (you) repose your faith on, you take initiation from him. But when it’s officiating, it’s whoever is nearest, and he was very clear.

He named them. They were spread out all over the world, and he said, ‘Whoever you’re nearest, you just approach that person, and they’ll check you out. Then, on my behalf, they’ll initiate.’” 6

It was a breath of fresh air, but this was the early Eighties. No INTERNET. The means to spread ideas was position papers via copy machines or slow-moving word of mouth. Those two men and other leaders on the Commish knew that they could cover this revelation up before it reached any kind of critical mass. As could have been predicted, the two gurus had their suspensions reversed, they returned to their zones, re-engaged with their disciples, and everything got covered over again . . . just like it was previous to the Topanga Canyon talks at Pyramid House.

As expected, T.K.G. then sang a different tune. Hardly anyone in the movement knew of these machinations, and, for those who did, they acquiesced to their leaders. Things were breaking down, but the center still needed to hold. That center now became the vitiated G.B.C. The Commish issued a position paper which apparently explained everything. It was not the real explanation, however; it was only damage control. Chapter Nine closes by quoting this “ISKCON” propaganda:

“‘It is the duty of ISKCON’s initiating gurus to sit on their Vyāsāsanas and defeat the ignorance of the age by their strong preaching. Some of our men may have difficulties, but their problems are due to their having lost sight of Krishna for the moment, not due to sitting on a Vyāsāsana. . . Arjuna also wanted to step down from his chariot and abandon the fight, but Krishna condemned this as a great mistake.

Similarly, it will be a great mistake if our initiating gurus step down from their Vyāsāsanas. Rather, let them preach boldly by the side of Krishna as Arjuna fought boldly to crush the demoniac forces . . . So let us accept these failures and setbacks as pillars of success.’

Despite the G.B.C. paper, which attempted to rationalize the falldowns of so-called “uttama-adhikārī” gurus, more and more ISKCON members became disillusioned.” 7

Chapter Nine is a very long chapter. Your host speaker made a determination as to its essence, which is not immediately self-evident. We have already indicated this decision, so now let us proceed to that essence, which entails comprehending WHY the zonal ācārya scam collapsed much more quickly than it should have.

The Hare Kṛṣṇa movement (in terms of an international organization) is neither a democracy nor a republic. Nor is it an oligarchy or a tyranny, although, once deviated, it can degrade into that. It is not totalitarian but, to the unschooled eye, it may appear to be so. It is not a monarchy, but there is an indirect element of monarchy (the transcendental autocrat) in it, although that element is on a higher level.

The Hare Kṛṣṇa movement is, and must be, authoritarian. It is so at all levels. In terms of ISKCON (when it was bona fide), it functioned at the local level via spiritual authoritarianism. It did not, however, function as a Communist entity. Prabhupāda constantly deprecated Communism, and the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement made little if any tangible inroads into strictly Communist countries. That is an established historical fact. Indeed, in the early Eighties, three devotees in the Soviet Union were executed simply because they were Hare Kṛṣṇa members.

Then we come to the theocratic consideration. This is a touchy subject. The Hare Kṛṣṇa movement can be considered a kind of theocracy. Bogus theocracies are always totalitarian, and the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement can never be any such thing. It is a cultural movement, not an organized religion. It advocates and recognizes the legitimacy of totalism, but it utterly rejects totalitarianism.

Real theocracy is necessarily authoritarian, but not oppressively so. While it was bona fide, there was a distinct, viable, and authorized chain of command in Prabhupāda’s branch of the Kṛṣṇa consciousness movement. That is always wanted, even at the granular level of guru and disciple. Consider this purport from Bhagavad-gītā, 3.30:

“The Lord instructs that one has to become fully Kṛṣṇa conscious to discharge duties, as if in military discipline. Such an injunction may make things a little difficult; nevertheless duties must be carried out, with dependence on Kṛṣṇa, because that is the constitutional position of the living entity. The living entity cannot be happy independent of the cooperation of the Supreme Lord . . .”

Accepting orders in the authorized hierarchy of his movement was integral and all-pervading in Prabhupāda’s arrangement, while it remained bona fide previous to the zonal imposition of the late Seventies. As long as all the authorities observed this principle rigidly—as the purport says, as if in military discipline—then everything progressed quite well. The intrigues and treacheries of Maya could be overcome as long as this injunction was honored. The authoritarianism of his movement had Prabhupāda as its capstone and functioned down-line from him.

Devotees were dependent upon their assigned sevas, which were determined by the orders they received from those in command directly above them. This did not make the movement a military outfit, but from one perspective, it shared something with that paradigm.

Devotees wanted authority. They wanted orders. The orders generally remained bona fide while Prabhupāda was still with us, but everything went into the crapper in the Spring of 1978. This only became apparent—as in, more and more apparent—when the egregious falldowns of many comprising Ocean’s Eleven became common knowledge.

Devotees were much more compulsive than society at large, because they functioned according to non-egotistical desires. Acting in that way did not generate karmic reaction, because it did not entail making choices based upon self-centered, individual desires.

They knew they were fallen and not in a position to determine whether or not their services—if individually determined separate from the chain of command—actually were connected to the guru-paramparā. Once the zonal ācārya scam surfaced, no seva performed in that movement was connected to the paramparā, including initiations conducted for the egotistical benefit of “ISKCON” bogus gurus. However, that did not mean that the fan immediately stopped spinning.

For a short while, everything appeared to be the same to most devotees (your host speaker not included) because, to a significant extent, superficially it was so. Ocean’s Eleven should have been able to exploit this for decades, but they could not. They blew their opportunity to enjoy like Prabhupāda (and they were all imitation Prabhupādas), because they went way too far. They imitated ostentatiously, and, more importantly, they criticized each other and fought amongst themselves.

If you employ higher intelligence (prajñā) to its analysis, these are the chief and deeper realizations to glean from Chapter Nine. These conclusions lie at the base of the falldowns and what ensued in “ISKCON,” and they became too much to any longer bear by the rank-and-file. This theme will be expanded upon next month, because Chapter Ten of ENE continues to describe how the internal breakdown of that pseudo-Kṛṣṇa abhāsa-dharma degraded even further. Expect more on this topic in order to understand the deeper realizations intrinsic to it.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” is a pseudo-spiritual scam. It is very late in the game if you have not yet realized it as such. An in-depth analysis provided herein, for your edification and realization, is now provided for you.

You should have no inclination whatsoever—what to speak of compulsion—to follow any orders, routines or worship services promulgated by “ISKCON,” because all of its leaders and gurus are bogus. They have been so for decades. As long as that organized religion is kept from securing political power from behind the curtain, it will continue to be exposed, it will continue to degrade. The tainted preaching of “ISKCON” will then find its momentum checked, stopped, and reversed.

OM TAT SAT

ENDNOTES

1 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, (p. 166). Kindle Edition;

2 Ibid, p. 167;

3 Ibid, p. 167;

4 Ibid, pp. 173-74;

5 Ibid, pp. 181-82;

6 Ibid, pp. 188-89;

7 Ibid, p. 207.


Podcast transcription (March 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Ten by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Ten of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

Having spent my adolescent years in Wisconsin, I had plenty of experience with snow. It is a very cold and snowy State in the winter months, and I had plenty of experience to pick up snowfall patterns. One of these was a counter-intuitive tendency demonstrated by incoming storms: The really large snowstorms, the ones that eventually dropped many feet of snow, almost always started off very light for the first hour or two.

However, when heavy, wet snow fell at the beginning of an incoming storm, it almost always petered out, only dropping a few inches of the wet stuff on the ground. Analogously, ISKCON history records shocking revelations exposing the illegitimacy and pretensions of the eleven great pretenders (the zonal ācārya era) to have entered the collective consciousness of the rank-and-file Hare Kṛṣṇa devotees as only drips and drabs in the beginning years. These eventually coalesced and snowballed into an avalanche, but it took years. Time changes things, but sometimes it changes things very slowly . . . and then it doesn’t.

In our ongoing review of Eleven Naked Emperors (henceforward, ENE) by Henry Doktorski, we now reach Chapter Ten. It is a bit of a tough read. It is a bridge chapter. There is no falsity in its recollection of what went down in the incipient years (1980 and 1981) in which the deviations and egregious actions of the “new gurus” were initially exposed.

Yet at the same time, the account in this chapter does not read smoothly. The story jumps at a number of points. It takes on a number of threads and tries to effectively mesh them, but that proved to be a tough task. It does its best to accomplish the meld, but comes up short.

Chapter Ten is helpful. I am not going to delve into all of the threads brought forth, but I shall share my knowledge, realization, and intelligence with you relative to what I consider its essentials. I am mentioned (not criticized) often in the chapter. One of the ways I am discussed is very obvious, but that vantage point will not be explored here.

My contribution to exposing the zonal ācārya pretension during those incipient years (of my whistle-blowing) in the early Eighties was in a certain way, namely, I worked from behind the scenes. There is no need for the listeners and readers of this podcast to be brought into any kind of granular account of my personal life during that subset of the “ISKCON” saga, although Chapter Ten does touch upon it to some extent. You either get my drift or you do not. Either way, that should have no effect on the transcendental benefit you can herein derive.

The only potential blemish in this bridge chapter is its reproduction of an exchange in West Bengal, a long diatribe from Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar relative to the early difficulties in “ISKCON.” This was precipitated by one of its new gurus, Rāmeśvara, who approached him having lost faith in the grandiose worship demanded of all eleven of the great pretenders, himself included. He wanted to stop pretending, and he tried to do so.

Although I am going to criticize him in this review, he deserves positive acknowledgment for having made an effort to stop taking that ridiculous maha-bhagavat worship. He did this before any of the others then followed his lead. He also was the only one of the eleven that did not concoct an elevated title for himself. He deserves credit for that, also.

Rāmeśvara is a central figure throughout Chapter Ten. He approached Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar for advice and relief. He went from the fire pan into the fire by doing so. Once again, catchy tropes from the Navadvipa mahant disguise the irrefutable fact that his advice in 1978 to the G.B.C. was integral to the ācārya hoax which was implemented that year.

I choose not to reproduce any of the exchange. If you have the correct perspective of how much damage that Bengali Goudiya Mutt leader did to Prabhupāda’s branch of Lord Caitanya’s movement, you will not be negatively impacted by reading the exchange, but I shall not facilitate it here. The contradictions and hypocrisy of all of his flowery advice in the exchange is reprehensible . . . but can be intoxicating, also.

The First Transformation could never have gotten liftoff without his input, and now, in the early Eighties, the chickens were coming home to roost. The nihilistic seeds of its own destruction already were in “ISKCON” in the late Seventies. In no small measure, they were planted by Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. Yet, Western Guru (as he is called sometimes in the chapter) ironically goes to the man who did that to us for more advice.

The gerund of his words being intoxicating is applicable to the extent that a reader of Chapter Ten—particularly, one with a poor fund of knowledge–could become bamboozled by imbibing what only appears to be sage advice. If you know what is what, then ENE relating this exchange (with all of its syrupy slogans) is not foreboding but instead is a recording a historical exchange that few even know about to this day.

Doktorski, as we have pointed out repeatedly, is a first-class investigator. He has discovered an account of this meeting in Bengal and chose to bring it to our attention. Western Guru was clearly bewildered, and he became further bewildered after soaking up more nescience from Navadvipa. He did not get what he was seeking . . . at least, not in the long run.

We find the following excerpt from a Prabhupāda purport in Chapter Ten:

“Unfortunately, when the ācārya disappears, rogues and non-devotees take advantage and immediately begin to introduce unauthorized principles. . . . The ācārya, the authorized representative of the Supreme Lord, establishes these principles, but when he disappears, things once again become disordered.” 1

This well-known excerpt is reproduced by ENE in this chapter, and rightfully so. Although the BBT editors decided otherwise, I would have chosen to capitalize Ācārya, because the excerpt only refers to an uttama-adhikārī Successor in the line. Only he can establish the real principles of spiritual life in human society. Things became very disordered after His Divine Grace departed, and almost every devotee can see that now. However, in the early Eighties, hardly anyone saw it, although your author was an exception to that rule of cult blindness.

The unauthorized principles established by The First Transformation were mind-boggling, but few knew that Prabhupāda had nothing to do with it. You cannot pin it on him. This has been established as an irrefutable fact by now, although those who fell away do not recognize it. They blame him. Prabhupāda did not appoint a Successor nor did he appoint gurus. He spoke on the principle of regular guru (which means a madhyam who has received the order to be an initiating spiritual master), but he did not recognize any of his men as guru.

Chapter Ten discusses some early fallout after knowledge of inevitable personal anomalies, anachronisms, and fall downs began to very slowly (but what proved to be irreversibly) filter into the collective consciousness of the devotees. However, in the early Eighties, it was not a stone cold metaphysical lock that this momentum of exposure was irreversible, although it is certainly irreversible today.

ENE introduces pointed excerpts in this chapter, so let us reproduce two of those and discuss them. Remember, they are valid because they apply to the situation of “ISKCON” in the early Eighties:

“Self-made guru cannot be guru. He must be authorized by the bona fide guru. Then, he’s guru. This is the fact. Nobody can be self-made anything. A medical practitioner, he cannot become self-made, that ‘I have studied all the medical books in my home.’ No.

Have you ever gone to the medical college and taken instruction from the bona fide teachers? Then, if you have got the certificate, then you are medical practitioner. Similarly, bona fide guru means he must be authorized by the superior guru.” 2

The right interpretation is this: The ultimate bona fide guru is non-different from the superior guru referenced in this excerpt, and he is non-different from Prabhupāda in the context of his statement. Did any of the eleven rittviks receive any kind of certification from Prabhupāda as to their alleged guru status? They did not.

There was no appointment of gurus . . . what to speak of eleven Successors! There was no such recognition. The eleven were only appointed as rittviks, which was no big thing, because there had been rittviks serving in that formal and ceremonial capacity since 1970.

Prabhupāda never recognized any of them as regular gurus, what to speak of uttama-adhikārīs. If he recognized any of them as initiating spiritual masters, he would not have appointed them as merely rittviks. The eleven parlayed their appointment as rittviks into a covert appointment of initiating spiritual masters, and this was bogus. It was a false pre-supposition that was finally being revealed in the early Eighties. Chapter Ten is all about that incipient exposure, which was the beginning of the end of the zonal ācārya scam, although few saw it as such.

The author of ENE later received a Facebook message from Robert Grant concerning his (Rāmeśvara’s) vacillating change of heart in connection to the “ISKCON” gurus during the early Eighties. He had been read the riot act by one of the prominent and powerful female devotees at his Los Angeles headquarters after she listened to the “appointment tape” and discovered that there was no guru appointment on it.

This shook him up. He removed his opulent seat from the temple room (a good first step, obviously) and then busted himself down from uttama-adhikārī to madhyam-adhikārī. However, he was not a madhyam-adhikārī since he was still heavily entangled in institutional anartha. That is proven in his Facebook message to Doktorski, which is loaded with contradictions. We shall be detailing those here.

Rāmeśvara had significant local influence, but the other powers that be in “ISKCON” at that time—namely, most of the other so-called mahā-bhāgavats (three others were also being disciplined)–decried his new realization. They convened an emergency meeting in Dallas to confront and threaten him. Here is that Facebook message to Doktorski:

“The G.B.C. convened an emergency meeting in Dallas, where they voted to excommunicate me for heresy against the gurus. I tried my best to convince the others to step back, or at least let me step back from the concept that simply by Śrīla Prabhupāda’s order for us to give dīkṣā, that automatically elevated us to a level that none of us were on. Unfortunately I was not able to convince them. I debated them for a day, but the outcome had already been fixed: they had already voted and written the excommunication letter before I even arrived.

They said withdrawing my papers wouldn’t be enough—they insisted that I write a new paper retracting everything I had previously said. So I went back to my writing team and asked that we find the most extreme elevated statements about the exalted pure devotees who appear from the spiritual world as bonafide gurus, thinking that maybe when they read about the guru seeing Krishna in Vrindaban it would embarrass them into finally stepping back. Instead, they praised the new paper, saying it was the greatest thing I had ever written!

That’s when I started to fall away, having lost faith in the ISKCON gurus and the G.B.C. that endorsed them. They ordered me to live as a hypocrite. That loss of faith gradually affected my sadhana and I became an easy victim to the illusory energy. It took many years to shake that off and eventually I began crawling back to ISKCON. That was only possible because I never doubted Śrīla Prabhupāda and his books.” 3

Decades after the zonal debacle, it is almost mind-numbing to see how deluded this man still is. Granted, for a brief time, he came to his senses and stopped taking uttama worship; that somewhat radical step deserves positive acknowledgment. We have already given him that.

Despite these positive steps, none of his position papers and actions actually produced anything tangible. Why they did not is practically self-evident in his Facebook message to Doktorski here decades after the zonal ācārya hoax cratered. He starts it with a historical inaccuracy, viz., that he was excommunicated. Due to the fact that he capitulated to the G.B.C. at the Dallas conclave, he was only threatened with excommunication.

He claims that he tried his best. His best? No. There are many steps that he could have taken which would have been far better than his capitulation to the pressure they put on him. For starters, he could have accepted excommunication. That would have been the obvious right move, but he was not courageous enough to take it. Had he done so, he could have made strong propaganda against the hoax, having accrued street cred in doing so, because he accepted ostracism.

You may counter this by imagining that they would have assassinated him. Is that so? Would they actually have been so immersed in their so-called allegedly untouchable status as to have ordered the murder of one of their own? And without drastic repercussions? If he was excommunicated and making propaganda against them–combined with śāstric evidence and a clear ethical stance–law enforcement and the press would have jumped all over any such assassination attempt.

At any rate, it would probably have only amounted to, at most, an unsuccessful effort. He had dedicated disciples, and some of them were enforcers and hatchetmen. He would have been well-protected, and he would not have been hurting for income from his many disciples in order to maintain himself and his preaching. The path was wide open for him to have exposed the whole thing at an early stage. If he had done so, the rest of the movement would have been spared much grief. Remember: The zonal imposition dragged on for many years after this Dallas incident recounted in Grant’s Facebook message.

He mixes in again the major misconception that Prabhupāda ordered the eleven great pretenders to be initiating spiritual masters. He most certainly did not. None of them received that order. If any of them had individually received that order from him, that disciple would have let it be known just how and when and under what circumstances he had received it. None of them did that, because none of them received it.

Yet, in this much later message to Doktorski, Rāmeśvara is stating that they were ordered to give dīkṣā as an initiating spiritual master. The eleven were only appointed as rittviks, nothing more. Fortunately, this fact is starting to become common knowledge now, and people are catching on. The accurate interpretation of the reality in the late Seventies will continue to expand until almost everyone finally realizes it.

When this transpires, it will contribute to critical mass, which has not yet been attained. Then, the current “ISKCON” make-show will be rejected and railed against in a way which will accelerate until it no longer has any influence in the world. That is sorely wanted.

Rāmeśvara’s current mentality (as demonstrated in this Facebook message reproduced in ENE and herein being analyzed) will not help us much. He is still bewitched. He claims that it was wrong for the eleven to take uttama worship. However, in the same sentence, he makes the false statement that Prabhupāda appointed them as initiating spiritual masters. When you multiply a positive number by a negative number, guess what: You get a greater negative result! He’s part of the Old Guard, not part of the solution. It is doubtful that he will ever become part of the solution.

He then says that, at the Dallas conclave, they ordered him to retract his previous position paper, which had urged the rest of them to follow his lead and act as madhyam-adhikārīs or regular gurus. Well, he wasn’t one, so that paper had no potency or spiritual sequence. He was no longer a sahajiyā, but now he moved up to a miśra-bhakta . . . and very mixed within his own compromised intelligence. Returning to those early Eighties at the Dallas conclave, so what does he do? By his own admission, he accepts their order and authorizes a new position paper taking an opposite tack glorifying the guru as uttama.

It spews out all kinds of adulation about the inviolable status of every guru, because they are on the highest platform of realization and purity. He expected this to work? Incomprehensible! They all praised his new position paper, and he was astounded by that? Of course that would be their reaction! All of those men were absorbed in self-apotheosis. They were constantly surrounded by sycophants and yes men. They were glorified by pranam mantras and worshiped by adoring fools in front of open Deities while sitting upon high, lavish seats.

And they were, in effect, forcing him to once again do the same thing under threat of cult ostracism. It would have been a badge of honor for him to have accepted excommunication from “ISKCON,” seeing it as a gift offered by Paramātmā. The mere fact that he thought going so extreme in his paper would, somehow or other, be effective demonstrates that this man did not understand cause and effect.

TATTVAMASI

We then proceed to the end of his message. He writes: “That’s when I started to fall away, having lost faith in the ISKCON gurus and the G.B.C. that endorsed them.” This term “fall away,” in his mind, is nothing more than a synonym for falling down; that is proven by the context of his final paragraph in the Facebook message.

He still mixes up his capitulation with justifiable doubts that he could not eradicate. Doubt can be either a product of sinful actions or it can be a facet of intelligence. In this case, back in the early Eighties, when applied to “ISKCON” gurus, it was the latter. The colossal hoax of the zonal ācārya era was ati-pāpam, and all those entangled in it individually suffered sinful reactions. Everyone should have doubted what the vitiated G.B.C. was doing at that time. Rāmeśvara doubted but could not act upon that intelligence, so he capitulated.

As his compromised Facebook message closes, he writes: “It took many years to shake that off and eventually I began crawling back to ISKCON. That was only possible because I never doubted Śrīla Prabhupāda and his books.” Crawling back to what? ISKCON no longer existed when he came crawling back. It had been converted into a doppelganger, taken over and killed by “ISKCON.” Although somewhat subtle and only communicated between the lines, he is covertly (or subconsciously) urging all those who left the death cult to return to it now that it has repudiated the zonal ācārya hoax, which he helped implement in the early Eighties.

This Facebook message from Rāmeśvara to Henry Doktorski was transmitted on June 22, 2022. The lack of self-awareness and even basic intelligence in it is staggering. The man had over forty years to ponder what went down and why—and how he was entangled in it—but he had practically learned nothing. Did he actually make any contribution to the zonal debacle eventually cratering?

You can’t light a fire by pouring water on it. He simply produced smoke during that incipient stage of its exposure, but no real light. His initial steps to rectify the situation bore no fruit, because he was still to compromised. Fire serves, but smoke disturbs. He was not at all at the forefront of combating The First Transformation.

ENE goes on to explore how others in the early Eighties began to doubt the hoax of the uttama-adhikārī worship program:

“Satsvarūpa, like Rāmeśvara, also had doubts about his own purity and requested the G.B.C. in 1982 to allow him to reduce his worship. He was also voted down. Bahudaka dasa . . . remembered, ‘In Mayapur, 1982, Satsvarupa Maharaja requested to reduce his worship. The G.B.C. refused him. We were very angry about it. It was the first breakthrough that one of the eleven gurus wanted to come down to a reasonable level and the other acharyas said no.’

Three zonal acharyas—Tamal Krishna, Rāmeśvara and Satsvarupa —realized that they had been cheating the Society by pretending to be uttama-adhikārīs, and they expressed doubts about their legitimacy. But all three, under mounting pressure from the other zonals, recanted and once again mounted their thrones and began enjoying the extravagant worship unbefitting their status as show-bottle pure devotees. Why were they forced back into pretending to be acharyas?

Some say that the eleven had lied and cheated to gain their counterfeit positions as so-called uttama-adhikārī dīkṣā gurus, therefore they could not allow even one member to follow his conscience, protest the charade, and abandon the make-show.” 4

Some of the rank-and-file were beginning to doubt at that time, but it was a very slow process in the early Eighties. The First Transformation was still believed in by the majority of “ISKCON” devotees, especially the new people. Nothing like the INTERNET had yet emerged. Word spread but not quickly. Hansadutta could be added to this three-man list of zonals who expressed doubt about their opulent worship, which culminated in his de facto excommunication in May of 1983. His previous suspension as initiating guru had been earlier reversed by the vitiated G.B.C., but his personal shenanigans had continued unabated.

Ocean’s Eleven began to segue into damage control in the early Eighties. This was quite ironic considering their previous triumphalist attitude after crushing the malcontents at Raman Reti in early February of 1979. The best defense is a good offense, as the saying goes. As such, the pillar of the zonal scam was the assumed mandate of its great men, the eleven former rittviks, to be worshiped as sākñāddhari. That had to be kept in place! This idea (that the guru must be an uttama-adhikārī) required the worship program to continue, although all of them were light years away from such eligibility. Yet, according to their scheme implemented in the late Spring of 1978, they had to be seen as such by their devotees.

There was not enough resistance in the early Eighties in order for the majority of the zonals to consider changing their worship protocol. Obviously, they also got off on it, big-time! Those four who doubted were not united, but the rest were still united against them in order to keep it in place. They were able to beat back this incipient attack against the pillar of their pretension. ENE points all of this out.

Of course, they had lied and cheated in order to gain false statuses as uttama-adhikārī gurus, a monopoly which they still held in the very early Eighties. However, as we shall explore next month, they were soon forced to expand their number. Also, the backing of their uttama scheme by Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar–despite the fact that he was essential to formulating and forming it in 1978–was now on shaky ground.

In particular, he was criticizing actions that the G.B.C. had taken against Jayatīrtha, culminating in its schism with him in the Spring of 1982. To say that this split negatively impacted the zonal scheme in a profound way is a bridge too far. It remained strong, because the majority of the movement had fully invested in it for years.

And there was another factor: Those who had not bought into it were no longer part of “ISKCON.” They were outside the walls of the cult, and their influence was non-existent within it. Such was the case with Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar by that time, also. The schism was the right political move within the institution’s paradigm. It did not harm the pretension, which was still considered to be Prabhupāda’s will.

However, doubts expressed by four of their great men–and especially the falldowns of some stalwarts–required a new explanation in order to continue legitimizing the zonal scheme. Other first and second echelon sannyāsīs and commissioners wanted a slice of the initiating pie; they were chomping at the bit. The remaining zonals no longer could rely upon the so-called appointment tape. Word that this recording did not actually establish the eleven as appointed spiritual masters by Prabhupāda was spreading. Such an unsound source of legitimacy would not be able to hold up much longer, because Prabhupāda did not appoint them.

ENE delves into this conundrum as follows:

“Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda had not appointed eleven acharyas to succeed him in his absence, and the G.B.C. eventually admitted it. So they changed their story: they said the eleven acharyas were appointed by the G.B.C., and the G.B.C. was ‘the same’ as Prabhupāda. Bhaktivedanta Swāmi Prabhupāda had allegedly said, ‘ISKCON is my body,’ and he wrote in his will, ‘The Governing Body Commission (G.B.C.) will be the ultimate managing authority of the entire International Society for Krishna Consciousness.’ Therefore, the eleven acharyas claimed, becoming guru by a vote of confidence from the G.B.C. was the same as if Prabhupāda had personally ordered a disciple, ‘You become guru.’

The G.B.C. resolved, ‘The G.B.C. is the supreme authority in the management of The International Society For Krishna Consciousness and the direct manifestation of His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda.’ Puranjana recollected, ‘Sometimes gurus will actually admit that the alleged appointment tape of May 28th is weak evidence that they had been appointed. Hridayananda Swāmi later . . . began to contradict the original G.B.C. statement . . . that the evidence was in the May 28th, 1977, tape. He began to argue that Śrīla Prabhupāda’s WILL had named the G.B.C. as ‘the ultimate managers of ISKCON . . . ’” 5

Actually, it was Kīrtanānanda who initially came up with this rationalization. It did not establish a new transformation, obviously, but it continued to buy time. Exposing the fact that Prabhupāda did not directly appoint them got manipulated into another misinterpretation, viz., that his Governing Body Commission, allegedly non-different from him, appointed them. It did so, obviously. However, they made more out of it then originally designed, and this was the basis of the new transitive theory.

The “ISKCON” transitive theory is that Prabhupāda equals ISKCON, and the will of ISKCON is non-different from the G.B.C.. This simplistic formula satisfied the chelas if and when they finally began to hear about the so-called appointment tape being no such thing. Of course, at that time, no one had access to the letters.

Earlier in Chapter Ten, the following well-known excerpt (well-known now) from the one of the letters was reproduced:

From a letter to Commissioner Hansadutta, dated 4-11-72: “What will happen when I am not here, shall everything be spoiled by G.B.C.?” 6

This letter was sent to Hansadutta just days after Prabhupāda suspended the Governing Body Commission, busted it down, and transferred all the power back to the temple presidents where it originally resided before the creation of the G.B.C.. You host speaker has discussed this incident in detail in a number of articles, videos, and via other media formats. It had been buried, but it was resurrected, mostly by myself.

That centralization scheme of 1972 was the seed of deviation that eventually sprouted into a full-blown mutiny and takeover by the Ācārya Board of the G.B.C. in 1978. It proves, beyond doubt, that the G.B.C. was never non-different from His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda. It is a myth that it ever was. It is also a myth that it ever had or has a so-called automatic corrective mechanism intrinsic to or inherent in it.

Prabhupāda never officially ordered any of his disciples to become an initiating spiritual master. Show me where he did this. No one can show any such thing, because such a statement of appointment or recognition by him does not exist. He only appointed rittviks in July of 1977.

He never appointed a Successor, and he did not appoint any regular gurus, either. He briefly mentioned the principle of regular guru on the so-called appointment tape, but no names were attached to that principle. To link the May 28th discussion of the regular guru to the appointment of rittviks well over a month later is to create an illusion only.

This illusion was the basis on the zonal ācārya imposition, and people are catching on. They will continue to realize this fact. That illusion, that cheating, that massive institutional mendacity, was then parlayed into the uttama worship of eleven sahajiyās movement-wide, beginning in April of 1978, when it was implemented by force almost everywhere.

In the early Eighties, things were beginning to break down. Doubts were in the ascendant, but this was still only applicable to few devotees worldwide. It was the minority report. To staunch the developing situation, some kind of nifty explanation had to mined from the ocean of nescience. That came in the form of the above-mentioned rationalization, courtesy of Kīrtanānanda, one of the taproots of the uttama scheme.

It allowed “ISKCON” to kick the can down the road and bought the major players, those integral to the massive deviation, more time. Chapter Ten discusses an incipient counter-momentum—which was not at all strong in 1981-82—slowly seeping its way into the collective consciousness of Prabhupāda’s sincere and serious disciples. As mentioned, Chapter Ten is a bridge chapter. It is a recollection of the facts surrounding the beginning of the breakdown of the zonal ācārya imposition.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. The First Transformation of this make show was the zonal ācārya imposition. It took time for it to crater, and the die was not cast with certainty until the early Eighties. Rome did not fall in a day, and during the heyday of its decadence, virtually none of its citizens could envision that a small and persecuted cult would eventually replace emperor worship.

Rome was actually destroyed from within, and “ISKCON” was also in the incipient stage of being destroyed from within during the early Eighties. The tune of its fan was unplugged, but that fan was still spinning. The tune of its enchantment was still being heard, but the music was slowing. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTE

1. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987), p. 215). Kindle Edition. From a Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam purport to 4.28.48;

2 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement (1977-1987), p. 215). Kindle Edition. From a Nectar of Devotion audio transcript, Vrindaban, India recorded on October 31, 1972;

3 Ibid, p. 219;

4 Ibid, p. 221;

5 Ibid, pp. 222-223;

6 Ibid, p. 215.


Podcast transcription (April 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Eleven by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Eleven of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

By the mid-Eighties, fanaticism and reliability became issues in “ISKCON”: Too much of one and not nearly enough of the other. The second and third echelon fanatics were confronted with an unexpected problem: The gurus which energized their fanaticism were being exposed as frauds. They had placed blind and fervent faith in those so-called perfect men, but it was being demonstrated on a regular basis that their faith was misplaced. Of course, this was the case for only some of them.

Besides the rank-and-file that had no position one way or the other, amongst all loyalists, there was an unspoken, in-house split within “ISKCON.” On one hand, there were the Party Men who adhered to the G.B.C. (and not the gurus) being the source of legitimacy and connection to the guru-paramparā. By the late Seventies and the early Eighties, those who believed this constituted a minority report. Nevertheless, it was a substantial subset of the movement.

At every center in the world—with the notable exception of the Kṛṣṇa-Balarām complex in Raman Reti, India—the gurus and their men were the be-all and end-all in the eyes and minds of this majority faction. That spirit, however, was being severely tested in the mid-Eighties. A significant number of devotees yearned for a solution to the developing situation in which the gurus were being exposed.

In our running commentary of Eleven Naked Emperors (henceforward, referred to by its acronym, ENE), the second major publication of Henry Doktorski, we now reach Chapter Eleven. The previous chapter was a bridge between the ninth and the one we now analyze. This one, Chapter Eleven, contains more substance.

In no small part, that is because, during the years 1984 and 1985, “ISKCON” and its fanatics were being rocked by a perfect storm. Eight new gurus had been added previous to and during those years. The zonal system of principalities for the great enjoyers was thus breaking down. Nevertheless, all nineteen of them still took utterly undeserved uttama-adhikārī worship from their improperly initiated disciples.

However, the gurus’ remaining godbrothers and godsisters who were genuinely initiated by Prabhupāda—an ever-dwindling lot—were not worshiping them anymore . . . at least, not very many of them. This provoked doubt in the new people, all of whom barely grasped the spiritual science. These newcomers, with some exceptions, had little contact with their own spiritual masters. As such, they relied upon their temple presidents and the advanced members of the local congregation to be representatives of their gurus. Or they relied more upon a local sannyāsī who bivouacked at a given center.

One of the waves of this perfect storm was that many, if not most, of these presidents and sannyāsīs–outside the inner sanctum of the approved dīkṣā-gurus—were beginning to have doubts about what had been imposed on their movement since the Spring of 1978. Some of these malcontents were expressing these doubts. Some were having meetings where these doubts were being discussed. Even if the doubts weren’t being outwardly expressed, these sannyāsīs and presidents were no longer fired up about any of the gurus, including the zonal who was featured the center which they ran on his behalf.

This was ever-increasingly problematic for the gurus, because they were all enjoyers. They depended upon local sannyāsīs and their temple presidents to keep their (the gurus’) disciples faithful and loyal to them. They depended upon the local sannyāsīs and their temple presidents (of their zones, for those who still had zones) for their disciples to stay in those centers and be productive, especially in the matter of collections.

The gurus wanted nothing to do with management. However, the management which these gurus depended upon was becoming jeopardized, because the presidents—at least, many of them in America—were doubting the whole arrangement. Even if they did not openly express doubt, their lack of enthusiasm vibed it to the newcomers.

This first wave of the perfect storm hitting the “ISKCON” gurus was tough enough for the gurus, but there was more than this hitting them. The second wave buffetting the deviated cult was that of Neo-Mutt and its allegiance to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar of Navadvipa. This was an outgrowth from second echelon “ISKCON” men.

They were led to this new faction by the foolish decision of the G.B.C. to promote Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar into something he never was. While Prabhupāda was physically manifest, Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar was not at all prominent in the movement. He was, more or less, a nobody in it. Almost no one in the rank-and-file knew anything about him.

That would change when the vitiated G.B.C. used him in order to formulate and form their zonal imposition. It was Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar who coined the bromide “ācārya of the zone,” which then got converted into the term used in “ISKCON,” zonal ācārya. It was Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar who used the Bengali slogan mat-guru si jagat guru in order to allege that the guru—even if he is only a madhyam-adhikārī—must be seen by the disciple as a mahā-bhāgavat and worshiped accordingly.

There were so many of these tropes. All of them were manufactured ideas meant to spoil Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement of Kṛṣṇa consciousness, although this was not recognized by the leading secretaries. Instead, these manufactured ideas became the basis of a transformation that indeed spoiled the Kṛṣṇa consciousness Prabhupāda gave us.

“ISKCON” and its G.B.C. followed that bad advice. They followed all of the man’s bad advice. This would bite them big-time in the early Eighties, and that pain would only worsen by the mid-Eighties. With the exception of Jayatīrtha (obviously, a first echelon man), an ever-growing number of the second echelon “ISKCON” stalwarts “crossed the river” and joined his Navadvipa cult. They became a new branch of Gouḍīya Mutt.

Initially, they adopted The mahā-maṇḍala label. They are now known as the World Vaishnava Association. None of this would have transpired had not “ISKCON” bestowed all of that prominence, in the Spring of 1978, on the Navadvipa mahant. They used him at that time, but inadvertently made him out to be the father figure guru of the new gurus, since his manufactured ideas were adopted entirely by Ocean’s Eleven.

By the mid-Eighties, when the legitimacy of the zonal imposition and its opulent worship scheme was being profoundly questioned, Neo-Mutt was stirring the pot. It was recruiting more stalwarts, such as the influential Tripurārī Swāmi, who at that time was president at San Francisco. The Great Schism of 1982, although necessary, did not stop this second wave from crashing into “ISKCON” when it was even more vulnerable in the mid-Eighties. For awhile, it appeared as if the cult would crater.

Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar was making propaganda against it, as he had been doing even before the schism. The needle in and the damage done. He had said: “Rittvik-Ācārya, then it becomes as good as Ācārya.” The G.B.C. accepted this, which got parlayed into rittviks automatically becoming gurus, who then automatically were uttamas, who then were automatically Successors to Prabhupāda in the disciplic succession.

The Navadvipa mahant advocated for an Ācārya Board within the vitiated G.B.C.. That was adopted by the Commish, believing that the non-guru faction cannot have any authority to rule over, chastise, punish, correct, or even advise the new gurus. This made Ocean’s Eleven untouchable. It was never the intention of Prabhupāda, but it was Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar’s vision in the form of his advice . . . all of which was swallowed hook, line, and sinker and converted into The First Transformation.

By the mid-Eighties, a Neo-Mutt center had been created in Santa Cruz by Dhīra Kṛṣṇa, the former temple president at Los Angeles. This second Neo-Mutt wave was recruiting and hitting the cult hard, and it had its own rationalization as to why things were going awry in “ISKCON.” It preached that all of the problems were due to “ISKCON” not strictly following Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. Ironically, just the opposite was the actual truth: So many of the problems the cult was being harmed by in the mid-Eighties was due to imbibing and implementing all of that disastrous advice from the Navadvipa Mahant.

Neo-Mutt had now become the “ISKCON” nemesis. Neo-Mutt was against the teachings of Kṛṣṇa consciousness brought to the West by His Divine Grace Śrīla Prabhupāda, particularly in relation to his siddhānta that the jivātmā originated in the spiritual world. Devotees in general were now being misled by both of these warring cults.

The third wave of the perfect storm hitting “ISKCON” in the mid-Eighties consisted of what may be called the outsiders. These were the initiated men and women of the movement—none of them higher than the third echelon while they were in it—who left. Many of them were not kicked out but could not tolerate the deviation imposed when Ocean’s Eleven came back from India in the Spring of 1978 with a new dispensation.

This third wave comprised those who chose to take action, not to remain silent about what was going down. Most of those who left the cult of the new gurus–or were, directly or indirectly, driven out—just went away on their own. They created no ripples or spiritual sequence. Many of them threw out the baby with the bathwater and became non-devotees again, taking up their previous lifestyles.

This third wave was a factor in the mid-Eighties, although it was ostracized, ignored, and mostly kept away from “ISKCON” centers. The third wave took action. It was kind of a subterranean movement. Their position papers hit hard and tackled formerly taboo subjects. The “underground Hare Krishnas,” as one Hindu newspaper labeled them, punched above the weight of their limited numbers.

A handful did not, however. They took action. They made propaganda both of the verbal and written variety. Your host speaker was a part of this contingent. Position papers were produced. There was no INTERNET yet, so this preaching did not spread quickly . . . but it did spread. These dedicated disciples, from one perspective, were put into a lose-lose situation at the onset of the zonal ācārya scheme. They chose the lesser of two evils, as staying within the cult required buying its unauthorized transformation, which they were not willing to do.

The February, 1979 confrontation at the Kṛṣṇa-Balarām complex in Raman Reti (discussed previously in one of our podcasts) was the leading edge of this third wave. This third wave was anti-Neo-Mutt, however, and it had to be distinguished from any allegiance to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar and Gouḍīya Mutt. Neo-Mutt was unable to recruit these particular outsiders, who stayed true to Prabhupāda’s tattva, siddhānta, and process.

This third wave was a factor in the mid-Eighties, although it was ostracized, ignored, and mostly kept away from “the walls of ‘ISKCON.’” It was kind of a subterranean movement. An article in a prominent Hindu newspaper at the time labeled it as “the underground Hare Krishnas,” designating your host speaker as its leader.

With these three waves of a perfect storm hitting “ISKCON” in the mid-Eighties, the cult was reeling. It needed a savior. And, although he was imperfect and did not tackle or uproot the real problem, that savior emerged in the form of Ravīndra Svarūpa dās adhikārī. 1

In 1984, Professor Blueblood issued a position paper entitled “Ending the Fratricidal War.” He insisted that it was only meant for a handful of his close associates, as he was a temple president at the top of the second echelon of “ISKCON.” I doubt that this was his intention. Instead, I am convinced he issued it so that it would spread like wildfire, which it did, although it could not have as much impact—or immediate effect—as it would have had if the INTERNET had existed then.

Thus, Ravīndra became the leader of what he called a revolution. However, this is a mislabel, although he was only the immediate leader of an incipient development. It was never a revolution. It was never a rejuvenation. It did not return to square one. It was always nothing more than a reform, a transformation.

As we shall see, his tracts against the new gurus got him appointed by the G.B.C. as the nineteenth institutional dīkṣā-guru in the cult. Was this actually unexpected? How could it be? He was expert at knowing institutional cause and effect, and he admitted that he had to accept a leadership role in his so-called revolution.

He had a couple of assets that other men in the cult did not. For starters, he claims (and it is likely true) that he was never a hippie. Fine, although they were Prabhupāda’s best customers. As already mentioned, he was an established professor at a well-known university in Philadelphia, where he was temple President. These assets were utilized and manipulated well by him. He had peers who would back him in his reform effort, ultimately successful, meant to transform “ISKCON” into something different.
We find the following excerpt in Chapter Eleven:

“‘When we got the gurus, we got eleven different ISKCONs,’” Ravīndra Svarūpa confirmed. “‘There were some real unfriendly tensions between the gurus right from the start. They propped each other up because if the power of one guru was threatened, they all felt threatened. But when somebody finally fell, they turned on him and destroyed him.’” 2

That was Ravīndra’s main argument, to wit: It had become a sole ācārya movement instead of a united confederation under the G.B.C.. There were eleven sole ācāryas, and the movement was thus cut into pieces since the preaching, mood, and worship systems varied from zone to zone. It was a powerful argument, but not as legitimate as you might first surmise. All eleven of those great pretenders were dependent upon G.B.C. imprimatur in order to keep their scam going.

They were not as free as Ravīndra made them out to be. He probably intuited this. Even if he didn’t, he acted upon this fact of division, and that is integral to how he brought them down and introduced the collegiate compromise of The Second Transformation. In summary, the man was a powerful writer, and he had significant influence.

He also was expert at projecting a particular emotion. This basic and fundamental emotion will be directly presented near the end of our presentation. It was used by all of them to great effect, and Ravīndra was adept at it. Besides this, a key plank of his new manifesto for “ISKCON” was that it had degenerated into a neophyte cult.

The implication to this—which was a false pre-supposition—is that it previously was dominated by fixed-up devotees, by madhyams. As such, he was saying that the zonal ācārya imposition was now run by neophytes, who are intrinsically envious, and that this “sole ācārya system” needed to be made unified once again. Then, it would automatically revert (allegedly) to its former status as a worldwide, unified congregation guided by advanced devotees loyal to its G.B.C..

All kinds of falsity was embedded in this pre-supposition. Were they formerly madhyams? They were not, and the track record proves it. Were they, the eleven great pretenders, neophytes? Would abandonment of the zonal ācārya system—and replacing it with a Commission-centric model—automatically produce a movement run by madhyams. History proves that it did not after The Second Transformation gained power. ENE quotes your host speaker as follows:

“He (Ravīndra) is claiming that ‘ISKCON’ (and that Society certainly was ‘ISKCON’ by 1984-1985) was a kaniṣṭhā-adhikārī society. It was not. It was led by charismatic sahajiyās. These men were not kaniṣṭhās. In point of fact (with, perhaps, a temple president here and there that may still have been kaniṣṭhā), all the leaders of ‘ISKCON,’ by 1984-85, were either sahajiyās or mixed devotees. Mixed devotees are far lower than kaniṣṭhā-bhaktas, but few devotees know this bhakti science.” 3

This may appear to be radical, but the actual fact is that it may be too soft. Some of them may not have been even sahajiyās by the mid-Eighties. Remember, although very deviated and fallen, sahajiyās are, nevertheless, still devotees. Some of those eleven men—as well as some of the eight others who captured the gadi after them (by the mid-Eighties)–may have become either covert māyāvādīs or materialists. There is plenty in and on the record to indicate this potential.

“The Guru Reform Movement” was not only the title of Chapter Eleven, but it was also a sub-header within the chapter. There is a major misconception embedded in this idea, although it was considered just that (a guru reform movement) by the mid-Eighties. The guru is never in need of reform. The guru must be a very perfect man. The movement he founds, if it has not severely deviated from him, may require reform. However, the guru is never in need of correction or reform.

If he is fallen (and was previously a genuine guru), then he needs to elevate himself back to the perfectional stage. However, the implication of the guru reform movement in “ISKCON” was not referring to that; it was referring to men who were still improperly initiating new disciples but remained institutionally approved gurus.

By the term “guru reform movement,” what is being referred to in Chapter Eleven of ENE is the initial (and rather tepid) emergence of the temple presidents who were protesting the uttama-adhikārī worship program integral to the cult. Professor Blueblood was preeminent amongst them, and he penned the initial position papers which started the ball rolling. This was distinctly different from the rebellion at Raman Reti in 1979, and it was the chief point made by ENE in Chapter Eleven. Here is an excerpt verifying this fact:

“ . . . this was the first time large numbers of devotees with real political power—the ISKCON temple presidents—began organizing together to combat the menace. Actually, for many years, the temple presidents had been a formidable force in ISKCON. Although they had no legal power over the G.B.C., sometimes they had exerted their influence . . .” 4

The movement was starting to crater, and Professor Blueblood’s first position paper lit the fuse. From his own words in ENE:

“Ravīndra Svarūpa recalled, ‘In the autumn of 1984 a routine meeting of the temple presidents of North America led to a collective and public acknowledgment that nearly everyone held deep private misgivings about the manner in which the position of ‘guru’ had been established in ISKCON. They organized an immediate second meeting, to further consider the issue, and thus the ‘Guru Reform’ movement was born. With the engagement of a significant number of second-tier leaders, men whose loyalty to ISKCON was not in doubt, a credible and potent movement was established. The majority of North American temple presidents believed something was drastically wrong.’” 5

This was the same time-frame in which Ravīndra issued his first position paper, so none of it was accidental. He knew how to play them, and he was already the first amongst equals on the second echelon. The acceptance of his arguments solidified this power for him. ENE describes the situation in “ISKCON” at that time quite well:

“When new devotees began to take initiation from the zonal acharyas, the power of the temple presidents eroded. They no longer could motivate devotees to follow their direct instructions, let alone their vision . . . The new disciples often looked down on temple presidents, especially if they were householders, and consequently they rebelled in subtle and less-than-subtle ways against the temple presidents’ authority.” 6

Such was also the case for the non-guru contingent of the G.B.C.. Their zones became meaningless. The guru zones of the zonal ācāryas was all that the newcomers considered important. As genuinely initiated devotees of Prabhupāda kept departing from “ISKCON,” the idea that there was legitimacy to a non-guru G.B.C. at any given center or temple became, for all practical purposes, an anachronism.

It was costly in terms of airfare and other accouterments for a non-guru G.B.C., or even a temple president, to attend meetings in distant parts of America, what to speak of overseas in India. That these members of the second echelon of the cult were dependent upon the pick to cover those expenses did not sit well with them. The new disciples, all improperly initiated, didn’t want the money they collected to be used by leaders who were now fighting against their own gurus.

TATTVAMASI

“ISKCON” loyalists were coming to tough realizations. One of them—who eventually became completely disloyal, changing his name and status after joining Neo-Mutt—commented as follows:

“Practically the present ISKCON leaders don’t have truly brahminical advisers anymore because everybody in their zone has something to lose and thus will leave or shut up . . . Even though gurus and the G.B.C. amongst themselves and in public will discredit and condemn each other, officially there is no one who can question an acharya in his zone, nor is there anybody to consult in such difficulties.” 7

The temple presidents began outwardly expressing their disgust about what they had repressed for years. They wanted to get together, and thus they had a meeting in New Jersey. Word got out, and then the actual base emotion which controlled everything came to the fore. As excerpted from ENE, here is an example of that base emotion in the words of a major organizer of those initial meetings, Viṣṇugada:

“However, after we scheduled our next meeting for sometime in the spring of 1985, we immediately got black-balled by a group of gurus. My recollection is that temple presidents were forbidden to attend the next meeting. It was quite a shock to me.” 8

Do you pick up on the emotion underlying this? We shall specify it subsequently. Ravīndra, as aforementioned, was expert at utilizing it. There should have been nothing shocking about it. We all had experienced it. The cult was a tyranny of both thought and action.
You were subject to condemnation and excommunication if you did not accept the self-apotheosis of the “new gurus,” although they were never actually spiritual masters. Their false status as so-called Successors to Prabhupāda could not be questioned by anyone below the level of the vitiated G.B.C.. And the Ācārya Board of the G.B.C. also kept them from being challenged, although that broke down eventually.

Which brings us to the Moundsville compound, a.k.a., New Vrindavan, in August and September of 1985. There would be meetings each month there at that time. These were not solely temple presidents meetings, although many presidents (Ravīndra being one of them, obviously) attended at least the second one. The first one was, technically, a G.B.C. emergency meeting called mostly by American commissioners, as something had to be done. Of course, it really wasn’t. ENE records that one as follows:

“In August 1985, the North American G.B.C., temple presidents and eleven ISKCON gurus attended a two-day emergency meeting at New Vrindaban to discuss issues, such as the development of a constitution, expanding the number of gurus, discussing the role of the spiritual master within ISKCON and evaluating the qualifications of current and future gurus.” 9

Ravīndra confirmed that his second position paper was integral to that meeting. Actually, it was also integral to the next one a month later. ENE quotes him as follows:

“‘Under My Order: Reflections on the Guru in ISKCON’ became accepted as the position paper of the reform movement, and the paper’s thesis helped lead, two years later, to the formal dismantling of the zonal-acharya system.” Indeed, it did.

Professor Blueblood’s first position paper, “Ending the Fratricidal War,” was well-received and circulated by “ISKCON” presidents and other malcontents. However, his second position paper carried more weight. The first meeting (in August) was not well known. The September meeting was very well attended, as word got out that the opulent worship arrangement was now going to be challenged. In point of fact, your host speaker thought, for years, that there was only one conclave in the late summer of 1985, but there actually were two of them.

Not much progress was made on formulating or forming a new constitution in either of these. The two issues that were confronted (to a significant extent) were both related: One general and one specific. The specific one centered on Bhāvānanda. The general topic centered on the guru system, advocating reform.

After conclusive evidence presented as to Bhāvānanda’s homosexual activities while he was (allegedly) a guru, he was suspended from initiating for six months. Bhāvānanda was also put on probation by the Privilege Committee. At the September conclave, it was determined that he would again be examined at the Annual G.B.C. Meeting in 1986. The writing was on the wall. Except for Kīrtanānanda, the high-flying gurus were all being busted down to dedicated Party Men. One by one, they were baling from a Sinking Ship of Fools.

Aside from Bhāvānanda’s malfeasance being exposed–along with the cult having disciplined three (of the eleven) gurus previously in the early part of the decade–things were starting to tear apart. The center was not holding. The G.B.C. was supposed to be that center.

However, it was–to a significant (but not complete) degree–controlled by the new gurus up to that time. Ravīndra’s opposition had to be ameliorated somehow–or, at least, compromised. As such, practically out of nowhere and without him going through the bureaucratic process, Ravīndra was awarded guru status at the September conclave.

Bhāvānanda took some responsibility for his illicit homosex, but he also blamed the guru system (which, however you cut it, was instituted by the governing body) for his massive deviations. He pleaded that there was really no ill intention on his part. ENE reproduces one of Hansadutta’s former disciples commenting on that plea:

“This is something like the fox saying he had no ill-intention when entering the hen house. Of course those who have committed crimes will attempt to claim innocence.” 11

To his credit, Doktorski in Chapter Eleven covers both the micro and the macro. He gives us important details to and for the historical record. He also allowed all of his readers access to essential overviews of not only what was going down in “ISKCON,” but why. He quotes your host speaker as follows to explain some of that why:

“The Party Men . . . are masters at creating doubt and guilt, masters of deception, masters at bewilderment, masters at enticement, masters at pseudo-persuasion, and, when the situation calls for it, masters at harassment and various psychic punishments. They have their own spheres, both gross and subtle. The various followers, who are weak in knowledge, mind control, and yogic development, can hardly escape the network of the Party Men once they become entangled in it. The Party Men buttress this astral network via the buildings, deities, vehicles, properties, and money on the gross plane, and those innocent but foolish devotee followers are completely trapped by them and their manifestations.” 12

Besides Bhāvānanda and the guru issue, Kīrtanānanda blackballed the whole effort. He issued a paper to counter Ravīndra, and mostly nothing of substance came from this follow-up meeting with his peers at Moundsville. Kīrtanānanda told his disciples to consider all of his godbrothers to be nothing more than the Rotary Club.

Of course, there were some notable exceptions. Professor Blueblood became a Commission approved spiritual master at the second multi-day meeting, even though he had no disciples ready for initiation at his center. That brought to five the number of new gurus added by 1985, along with the three which were added earlier in the Eighties, totaling eight.

Secondly, the vitiated G.B.C. made a list of resolutions to bring to Mayapur in the Spring of 1986 to be voted on . . . which meant, in effect, kicking the can down the road and buying more time.

Meanwhile, although this was the developing situation throughout America, hardly any of devotees elsewhere in the world knew about it. One exception to this—although he heard about the controversy later—was Jayānta Kṛt in France. He was a second echelon man. In the beginning zonal years, he was quite dedicated to Bhagavān, who was one of the most gung-ho of all the high profile gurus.

Jayānta Krt was dealt with severely by Bhagavān when he went to the other side on the guru controversy. In the short term, he wound up opening his own center, unaffiliated with “ISKCON,” in southern France. As such, he followed the same path as Dhīra Kṛṣṇa in America, who opened up that aforementioned separate center in Santa Cruz.

However, there was one big difference, since the one in California was a Neo-Mutt center. As Fate would have it, Jayānta Krt soon joined Neo-Mutt and became dedicated to Swāmi B. R. Śrīdhar. We shall be reproducing excerpts from him in a later presentation of this series. Suffice it to say that he and I are not only on opposite sides but inimical to one another. You will find that out soon enough. ENE, via the following excerpt, shared Jayānta Krt’s transformation to a completely different viewpoint from Bhagavān in 1985:

“I opened a small preaching center . . . in southern France and started to communicate with my godbrothers everything I had learned in the USA about the acharya issue. They were all flabbergasted, because no information on that topic had ever made it from abroad to the devotees at large in France and in the rest of Bhagavān’s zone . . . Between that meeting and Mayapur, Bhagavān spent thousands of dollars on phone calls all over the world to rally the troops for a counter-reform. In Mayapur, he gave a lecture quoting a verse from the Srimad-Bhagavatam according to which those envious persons who criticize the Vaishnavas will remain in hell as long as the sun and moon exist. . .” 13

Notice the method used by Bhagavān: F-E-A-R. This was always the foundation upon which Ocean’s Eleven utilized. This was that base emotion. Most everything else was window dressing meant to attract followers and keep at least a handful of godbrothers onboard for the purpose of upkeep and management of the centers. However, when the rubber met the road, it always came down to fear. Doktorski is to be commended for this chapter in his book. It was thorough, painstakingly researched, and it revealed facts and truths that otherwise would have merged into oblivion. Well done.

In summation, the revelations in the late summer of 1985 that Bhāvānanda had seduced a teenage boy gave the Guru Reform party encouragement and determination to challenge the high-flying zonals. As a backlash, the vitiated G.B.C.—which was still mostly controlled by the great pretenders—legislated and imposed various political road blocks so that the reformers could not make much progress:

“The G.B.C. knew the zonal acharya gig was up, but they had to act fast to save themselves and keep their power as best they could. The G.B.C. enacted measures to restrain the temple presidents and the opposition movement. They gave every G.B.C. member the right to appoint two people in their zones to participate in the (upcoming) Mayapur meetings with voting rights. However, the G.B.C. did not appoint temple presidents who were opponents to the zonal-acharya system; they appointed sycophants.” 14

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. Let us close this month’s presentation with the following excerpt from Prabhupāda:

“So, don’t spoil the movement by manufacturing ideas. Don’t do that. Go on in the standard way and keep yourself pure. Then this movement is sure to be successful. But if you want to spoil it by whimsical, then what can be done? It will be spoiled. If you manufacture whims and disagree and fight amongst yourself, then it will be another edition of these so-called movements. It will lose the spiritual strength.” 15 SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1 His Western name is William Deadwyler III, a professor at Temple University. He will be often referred to in this presentation as Professor Blueblood due to his obvious lineage;

2 Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: The Crisis of Charismatic Succession in the Hare Krishna Movement, p. 233, Kindle Edition;

3 Ibid, pp. 234-235, Kindle Edition;

4 Ibid, p. 235, Kindle Edition;

5 Ibid, p. 236, Kindle Edition;

6 Ibid, p. 237, Kindle Edition;

7 Ibid, pp. 237-238, Kindle Edition;

8 Ibid, p. 239, Kindle Edition;

9 Ibid, p. 241, Kindle Edition;

10 Ibid, p. 242, Kindle Edition;

11 Bhakta Eric Johanson, Ibid, p. 243, Kindle Edition;

12 Ibid, pp. 246-247, Kindle Edition;

13 Ibid, p. 256-258, Kindle Edition;

14 Ibid, p. 261, Kindle Edition;

15 Room Conversation in Aukland, New Zealand, 4-27-76.


Podcast transcription (May 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Twelve by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Twelve of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

The mid-Eighties, “ISKCON” was embroiled in contentiousness. Kali-yuga was having a field day amongst the various groups of argumentative and disturbed devotees trying to get over. The whole debacle was due to the vikarmic reactions that had been hammering the movement for its many deviations. Kali-yuga saw that it was a time for a change, similar to the big one that went down in the Spring of 1978.

Superficially, there appeared to be two factions vying for institutional supremacy. That was already acknowledged as The Guru Reform Movement versus the Zonals. The reformists were composed of malcontents opposed to the opulent worship of the “ISKCON” gurus, particularly the ten which remained from Ocean’s Eleven. Each of these two warring factions, however, also had sub-factions somewhat inimical to one another within them. As such, there were actually four factions vying for supremacy. One of these four would have to prevail, and that was to be decided in 1986 and verified in 1987.

If the established faction (Ocean’s Eleven and its hatchet men, sycophants, and vested interests) was able to overcome the reformers, then it would remain, although somewhat weakened, its own version of no change at the top of the turtle tank. That still seemed quite likely in 1985. However, by 1986, it appeared to be less so. It might not prevail. Let us call this one Status Quo. It produced The First Transformation of the late Seventies, and launched the apa-sampradāya.

Status Quo was still in power in early 1986: It controlled the vitiated G.B.C., and the majority of “ISKCON” devotees remained bamboozled by it. However, within it, there was another faction. This faction agreed with The Status Quo more than it did not. Nevertheless, its chief point of contention was a desire to expand the number of “ISKCON” gurus. A handful had been added to Ocean’s Eleven beginning in 1982. Status Quo didn’t like that but accepted it.

A minor expansion could be tolerated, but the eleven great pretenders—already whittled down due to Jayatīrtha’s defection—did not want their scheme challenged. If a mass of newer gurus was approved by this otherwise loyal guard within The First Transformation, then the zonal arrangement would necessarily be jeopardized.

This second group was Status Quo Modified. They accepted that uttama worship of the gurus of “ISKCON” must continue, they accepted that pranām mantras and concocted labels still be part of the program . . . but they wanted the number of gurus to increase. Status Quo considered them the loyal opposition—and they were that—but nevertheless these two constituted what should be seen in retrospect as an in-house struggle, a milder version of the real fratricidal war.

Then there was Ravīndra’s group. He wrote the position paper on “Ending the Fratricidal War,” but somewhat ironically, that treatise and a follow-up was only the opening shot across the bow. As already mentioned, this warring faction of reformists was also divided, although that internal division would mostly not be recognized as such in late 1986. It would be fully recognized in the next year just previous to the Māyāpur Annual Conclave of 1987, where many more changes were made.

We shall thus speak of the war of the mid-Eighties as four groups vying for control of the governing body. Besides being called The Guru Reform Movement, this third group can more accurately be called Compromise Reform. It did not want to draw any hard lines which it knew The Status Quo would fight to the bitter end.

Ravīndra called his movement a revolution, but it was never any such thing. It was always nothing more than a proposed reform, amounting only to another transformation when it got over. It would be different from Status Quo, but it would not confront the root issues of the deviation that opened Pandora’s Box and launched the institutional catastrophe just after Prabhupāda left the scene.

Yet, there was a group within the Guru Reform Movement (an absurd anachronism and misnomer if there ever was one) which would eventually oppose Compromise Reform. They were also Party Men, second and third echelon loyalists to the institution, but they were unwilling to compromise on the issue of initiation of the post-1977 newcomers.

Was this one actually revolutionary? Of course not, because it wanted everything to still work through the G.B.C., i.e., it did not recognize that the G.B.C. had been the chief scourge since Prabhupāda’s disappearance from material manifestation. However, in one way—and one way only—they were tapping into a raw nerve: They demanded that all the new disciples throughout the movement be informed that none of them had received a genuine initiation since joining in late 1977.

We shall label this fourth faction Radical Reform.

In summary: In 1986, the four contenders vying for “ISKCON” Supremacy (which would have to include control of the vitiated G.B.C.) were: 1) Status Quo, 2) Status Quo Modified, 3) Compromise Reform, and 4) Radical Reform. You may object that the fourth group should not have the adjective “radical” applied to it. This objection would be legitimate if it stood for a revolution, but because it was advocating only reform, the adjective remains applicable and acceptable.

All four had a strong argument. Which would win?

We continue with our running review of Henry Doktorski’s manuscript, his second book (of twelve, total), entitled Eleven Naked Emperors. This is his most important work to date. It will be referenced by its acronym ENE throughout this presentation.

We have now reached Chapter Twelve, which basically centers around the pivotal year of 1986. The chapter is entitled: “Preparing for Battle.” To some extent, that is accurate, since the conclusion of the war between the four factions would only be known in 1987, also a contentious year. However, the battle was already fully engaged. The preparatory battle stage was throughout late 1984 and all of 1985. No need to quibble about chapter titles, but your host speaker still chooses to mention it.

Let us now segue to some excerpts related to the historical narrative as presented by ENE in Chapter Twelve:

“The public revelation in August 1985 that Bhāvānanda had tried to seduce a teenage boy gave the members of the Guru Reform movement renewed determination to dethrone the zonal acharyas.” 1

In 1986, that determination increased exponentially, as Bhāvānanda’s status had been suspended, and he could no longer be guru or initiate new disciples. His fanatical disciples in Australia were greatly displeased by this punishment. They were materially productive . . . and loose like him when it came to enjoying sensual opportunities they could easily create for themselves in the cult atmosphere in which they operated. They threatened to crater the whole Australia yatra if Bhāvānanda was not reinstated at the Māyāpur Conclave in the Spring of 1986. They had the power to do that, and the vitiated G.B.C. capitulated:

“The powerful influence of the establishment was manifest when the G.B.C. reinstated Bhāvānanda as a guru in good standing, although he had been suspended only six months earlier after being confronted with an allegation of homosexual activities with a teenage brahmachari in Vrindaban, India; an allegation to which he confessed guilt. . . A pretender acharya confessed to having homosexual relations with a minor and within six months he was considered completely pure and able to initiate disciples? The temple presidents were appalled.” 2

The vitiated G.B.C. did not share what the final vote was to allow Bhāvānanda back into the club, but the scuttlebutt was that it was razor thin: Apparently, he made it by only one vote. Except for the Australian leaders, almost all of the other presidents were deeply disturbed by this G.B.C. capitulation. ENE relates how one of them, Yasomatinandan, the leader in Gujarat, was particularly appalled:

“We all went back to our temples with our hearts broken and hopes shattered having given Lord Chaitanya a wonderful gift of a faggot guru in his parampara on his 500th appearance day. We were absolutely convinced our leaders were destroying ISKCON.” 3

Of course, “ISKCON” had already replaced and killed the real ISKCON movement by that time. However, those still operating in the cult refused to recognize that . . . except, now it was dawning on them just what was going down. This example of corruption was mind-boggling.

As could only have been expected, the vitiated G.B.C., representing Status Quo, rejected Ravīndra’s latest position paper, entitled “Under My Order: Reflections of the Guru in ISKCON.” This was, of course, the treatise that bucked up against Kīrtanānanda’s “On My Order” in the confrontation at Moundsville of 1985. However, due to this Bhāvānanda brouhaha, there was now momentum generated for Status Quo Modified:

“Also at the March G.B.C. meetings, the G.B.C. gave official approval for twenty-six senior Prabhupāda disciples to begin initiating disciples.” 4

One of these twenty-six was Ravīndra, who actually got his guru approval the previous September at Moundsville. They needed to buy him off. Now they considered that not just him but all of his backers, allies, and potential allies needed some kind of institutional encouragement. In 1986, the zones were made more or less irrelevant, and “ISKCON” was going for guru numbers, abandoning exclusivity completely.

In doing so, it was implicating as many second and third echelon men as possible in its deviations. Compromise Reform demanded more than this, however. Would Status Quo Modified actually prevail in 1986?

There was another modification that was passed in the Spring of 1986 by the vitiated G.B.C.: How gurus at any local temples throughout the world would be worshiped would be determined by the temple presidents. If they chose to do so, they could restrain the undeserved uttama-adhikārī worship of the high profile ācāryas, particularly the ones who remained from Ocean’s Eleven.

As could have easily been predicted, the so-called Vyāsāsan [for the ISKCON gurus] at Raman Reti inside the Krishna-Balaram mandir was removed; indeed, the word got around that, immediately after Māyāpur, 1986, the devotees at that mandir threw it out of a second story window in order to watch it shatter into pieces. Yet, these changes did not satisfy The Guru Reform Movement very much. They demanded more than this.

Status Quo Modified prevailed at Māyāpur in 1986, but that was not the end of the story. The prominent gurus—along with the new gurus who strongly backed them (and, in many cases, imitated them)–still controlled the vitiated G.B.C.. And Bhāvānanda was a short-term winner, but a big-time, festering sore soon thereafter.

A comment I made about the scandal via a later email to Doktorski was shared by him in Chapter Twelve:

“With such a high percentage of new gurus being exposed for scandalous behavior, the 1986 G.B.C. should have acted with dispatch to reverse the whole scheme. It should have realized the importance of genuine guru—which none of the eleven, along with the other elected men later, were. None of them were gurus, because Prabhupāda said, ‘Regular guru, that’s all.’” 5

In other words, simply tweaking the protocol by allowing the presidents to determine whether or not their guru of the zone or a visiting new guru could or would receive (or would not receive) pompous worship did not constitute anything remotely near a root course correction of the real problem haunting “ISKCON” since 1978.

For much of 1986, your host speaker was the Treasurer and chief lecturer at the Berkeley center in California. Many of the devotees there respected me, and some of them questioned me when the word reached us about what went down in Māyāpur. We had all been cooperating with Atreya Rishi, the local G.B.C., and Trivikram Swami, the local sannyāsī. We were all thus part of The Reform Movement. I was, of course, a radical reformer, but I mostly (although not entirely) kept that to myself.

We did not think that Atreya and Trivikram would, in effect, sell us out like that. We thought wrong. Atreya was immediately made into an “ISKCON” initiating guru, and Trivikram was put on a one-year wait in queue 6 to be automatically approved as dīkṣā-guru if he remained scandal free when Māyāpur, 1987 rolled around.

Those who liked me at Berkeley considered all of what we were then informed about to be a betrayal. When we got this news about what went down, I drew up a concise petition condemning the G.B.C.. We considered Māyāpur, 1986 to be a massive expansion of deviant dīkṣā-guru by vote, combined with Bhāvānanda’s sexual exploits swept under the rug via re-admitting him to the “ISKCON” guru club.

We considered all of it to be a betrayal of Prabhupāda, and most of the devotees there in Berkeley put their necks out and signed the petition. Atreya and Trivikrama were confronted with an active bee hive of discontent when they returned to the Bay Area in April. “I was in Berkeley at that time and, when we heard that Atreya Rishi and Trivikrama had sold us out and accepted a ‘guru’ appointment, I created and circulated a petition against the G.B.C., which virtually all the members of the Berkeley temple signed.” 7

The movement had degenerated into a kind of oligarchy that even resembled, to some limited and incomplete degree, a form of fascism. Many of its devotees could no longer sincerely believe in it. They were internally horrified by what was going down.

Yet, they took a risk if they chose to express any of that in an open way. The demand for loyalty and an insistence on humility was demanded of them by the zonals and top echelon. That top hierarchy was loaded with hypocrisy, in no small measure because it was itself utterly devoid of humility. That created a kind of institutional parody or satire, as a once spiritual institution had become anything but.

The lifting of the suspension of Bhāvānanda and his provisional re-instatement as dīkṣā-guru was the most obvious gas fueling discontent amongst the temple presidents. Their anger was being supercharged, and the zonal scheme was not holding. The center—if you consider the center of “ISKCON” to be its vitiated G.B.C.—was not holding, either.

Expanding the number of dīkṣā-gurus weakened the zonal arrangement. The guru principalities were losing meaning. Bhāvānanda becoming free of his suspension, along with his provisional re-instatement as dīkṣā-guru in his zone, was resolved on unsound, shaky, emotional grounds. The expansion of gurus, along with Bhāvānanda being dealt with so permissively, was spelling an end to Status Quo.

And Status Quo Modified gave way to Compromise Reform.

Actually, Bhāvānanda was still checked to some limited degree, and rightly so. His probation was lifted, but he was not allowed to initiate new disciples until October of that year. He had to keep his nose clean for another six months. As it turned out, he didn’t. In “ISKCON,” an institutional guru was considered automatically good unless caught in deviation. That rubber-stamp was still in full effect in the Spring of 1986. Bhāvānanda had been caught the previous year, but he got provisionally re-instated, nevertheless.

Kīrtanānanda had not been caught yet, so the underlying institutional hypocrisy was practically all-pervasive at a foundational level. Although previously this realization had been subconscious, it was not entirely so by this point. “ISKCON” was without real honesty, but such had been the case for years. Cheaters all of them, but not all of them had yet been caught in a flagrant act of cheating.

There were indications that Bhāvānanda had not brought himself back up to the standard that was demanded of him. He was ordered at a San Diego G.B.C. meeting in August, 1986 not to travel any longer with his young disciple and male companion, Bala. The purport of that order is quite self-evident; his guru reinstatement was not yet solidified.

The zones were becoming shaky entities; as such, the zonal divisions had been re-affirmed at Māyāpur, 1986. Obviously, they were no longer fully effective. Some token concessions (besides the expansion of gurus) were made to the temple presidents in relation to Vyāsāsans, photographic placements of guru pictures on altars, and how the altars were to be arranged. This amounted to nothing much.

Technically, seventeen men (led by Ravīndra) had been given preliminary approval to be dīkṣā-gurus at Moundsville in 1985, and they all were fully approved (read, re-affirmed) at Māyāpur, 1986. Seven more received full approval at that conclave. Six more so-called advanced devotees (led by Trivikram) were put on a one-year list to wait in queue. As such, a total of thirty new gurus were either institutionally activated (or soon to be actuated) as per G.B.C. rubber stamp in the Spring of 1986.

The G.B.C. insisted that it was not making new gurus via this method, because authorization was allegedly not the same as appointing or creating gurus. This was and is very weak logic: What is the real difference between making and authorizing? That is a rhetorical question.

Another change was a new rule applicable to how someone became an institutional guru in “ISKCON.” The new G.B.C. mandate required a potential candidate for guru to be presented by at least one G.B.C. man, the minimum requirement. A vote was then taken by the whole of the G.B.C.. If the majority did not object to the nomination, he was put in a one-year queue, after which he was recognized as a full-fledged dīkṣā-guru. The no-three-blackballs protocol of 1985 was thus abandoned.

TATTVAMASI

Superficially, it appeared that the issue of fairness was at the core of this guru expansion ploy, but that was not the case. It was politics, plain and simple. It was a compromise which kept Radical Reform in check. The radical reformers (what to speak of the revolutionaries outside the cult) were disappointed by what went down at Māyāpur.

Subsequently in this presentation, we shall present details about the assassination of Sulochan in the fourth week of May, 1986. What is mentioned now is just a prelude. Everyone knew that Kīrtanānanda was behind the hit and authorized it. He was a recognized “ISKCON” guru, but this was murder!

It was a scandal that required damage control at a different level. Murder is not what saintly gurus are supposed to be implicated in. Compromise Reform, which turned out to be the 1986 triumphant party, received fresh impetus to rein in wild-card gurus, especially since one of them proved capable of ordering hits on malcontents. Icing opponents was not part of “ISKCON” protocol.

After the assassination of Sulochan, Kīrtanānanda was not institutionally removed as a dīkṣā-guru from “ISKCON.” However, steps were taken by the vitiated G.B.C. to remove him. A G.B.C. representative received a verbal promise from Kīrtanānanda, via a telephone conversation, that he would resign from the G.B.C. (which would also mean that his guru status would be revoked) if he was named as a co-conspirator in indictments for either the murder of Sulochan or Cakraddhārī or both.

Two other gurus were exposed in the summer of 1986. Bhagavan resigned as G.B.C. and left his zone to run away with a female disciple. Rāmeśvara, disguised by a wig and dressed in karmi clothes, was accidentally seen (read, caught) by one of his godbrothers at a Southern California mall holding hands with a female teenager, probably his disciple.

As could only be expected, the Sulochan murder shook up the whole of the movement. The North American Temple Presidents (NATPA) called for an emergency meeting in Chicago, mostly to request (read, demand) that Kīrtanānanda be removed from “ISKCON.”

In the wee hours of May 22nd, 1986, Sulochan had parked and turned off the engine of his Dodge van (which he slept in) near an abandoned trestle bridge within a mile of Watseka Avenue. This was the chief avenue of “ISKCON” action in L. A., and the temple complex was located on it. There is evidence that he had enjoyed himself at the house of one of his godbrothers, who lived on a street close to the temple. The man who would murder him had discovered Sulochan’s van parked at that godbrother’s house; he was prepared to find the best spot for an ambush when Sulochan decided to call it a night and drive away somewhere nearby.

At zero dark fifty-seven in Culver City, California on the night of May 22nd, Sulochan was sitting in the driver’s seat of his old Dodge van. According to Doktorski’s research (in a previous book), he was rolling a joint. Unknown to the manhunters pursuing him, Sulochan had given up his campaign against Kīrtanānanda and the vitiated G.B.C., which still backed the “Bhaktipada.” While living in the mountains near Badger, Sulochan had found a new devotee girlfriend. Her mother, who backed his cause, approved of him, a handsome, thirty-three year old man, who was also well built and interested in starting a family.

He saw no hope in getting his children back, and he no longer was interested, either sexually or otherwise, in his former wife, who was fully dedicated to his arch-nemesis, Kīrtanānanda. That “ISKCON” guru had started the whole ball rolling by, without Sulocan’s consent, initiating his wife against his will. Sulochan was now going to start a new life, but the demigods had other plans.

The astral situation at that time was extremely inauspicious. The Moon was conjunct malefic Ketu in Libra. The lunar phase was the third worst possible: The fourteenth tithi of the waxing Moon. It was night time, and evil planets are stronger at night than during the day.

At zero dark fifty-seven on May 22nd, malefic Mars was in the twelfth, the house of loss. The ascendant (Capricorn) was ruled by retrograde Saturn in the sign of revenge, Scorpio. Saturn was casting his full seventh house aspect on the Sun, who was lord of the eighth, the house of death. The Moon was fully under the aspect of Rahu.

Mercury is the planetary karaka for writing and communication. For most of 1985, he was not combust and working for the young man, but that night Budha was completely wiped out by the Sun. Sulochan had lost his mojo. As a result, his sporadic brilliance as a writer was compromised, and he had descended into intoxication, ruled by Rahu.

Sulochan had transformed his attack on Kīrtanānanda to that of becoming a vociferous critic of the zonal ācāryas, including Rāmeśvara. Rāmeśvara had hatchet men, and his bodyguards were similar (in their killer mentalities) to the wicked enforcers which Kīrtanānanda had employed at his Moundsville prison compound in West Virginia. One of those manhunters, a Vietnam vet named Thomas Drescher, was a disciple of Kīrtanānanda; his Vedic name was Tīrtha. He was there in Culver City that night. He had tracked his prey and was ready to act.

Kīrtanānanda and Rāmeśvara had reasons to be paranoid about Sulochan, but that is a long story. Sulochan was now in Rāmeśvara’s zone, within striking range. Rāmeśvara had warned Sulochan that he would be “dead meat” if he did not return all of Prabhupāda’s letters, copies of which he had obtained by surreptitious means through the agency of a godbrother who had access to them. Sulochan was not going to give any of those back, especially since potent excerpts from them were the basis of his upcoming expose, The Guru Business, which your host speaker had edited for him the previous summer.

The wrong idea that the Raman Reti room conversation of May 28th, 1977 had allegedly established eleven Successors to Prabhupāda would be exposed by Sulochan via his commentaries on the partial transcript of that room conversation. He would accomplish far more than that in his book, which was on the verge of being published. He would not live to see it, because he would be assassinated that night, nine years later (almost to the date) of that important room conversation in India.

In Chapter Twelve, ENE reveals the following:

“Sulochan began writing a book about his findings, but he discovered he was not a writer. He badly needed an editor. . . Sulochan contacted a brahmin godbrother who was not only highly regarded as a scholar but also as one who had battled against the zonal acharyas in 1979: Kailasa-Chandra dasa. The two traveled together in Sulochan’s van for three months during the summer of 1985, during which time Kailasa-Chandra edited Sulochan’s manuscript, The Guru Business.” 8

Sulochan fancied himself a ksatriya or warrior, but he was no match at any level to Drescher. Tīrtha was an accomplished killer in Southeast Asia, had already murdered a devotee (Cakraddhārī) at the Moundsville compound, was being paid to kill Sulochan, and had back-up with him when he advanced upon Sulochan’s van that night. Sulochan had ran his mouth off about the violence he hoped to carry out on gurus (but never did). Despite his change of mentality, the lag effect of that was still attached to him on the psycho-physical plane. He had to pay the price for it.

As already mentioned, the planets were unfavorable to him that Wednesday, which was ruled by Mercury, who was completely wiped out. ENE mentions Sulocan’s effort as follows:

“Sulochan began a smear campaign against Kīrtanānanda and the other zonal gurus and went so far as to suggest that violence was an acceptable method for removing the zonal acharyas from power. Sulochan, who had a kshatriya spirit, sharpened his marksmanship skills on a target range by shooting a pistol at a picture of his arch-nemesis: Kīrtanānanda.” 9

Shared by ENE, here is a direct quote from Sulochan:

“Sulochan explained, ‘Kīrtanānanda lived by violence. He personally authorized so much physical violence against his godbrothers and godsisters that it was no surprise to us that his punishment also came by violence. . . . By failing to rectify themselves at New Vrindaban on September 16th, these gurus more or less declared open season on themselves and they have no one else to blame. It is only a matter of time before each guru is dead or wishes he were. This is just a fact of life. Their fate is sealed by their own actions.’” 10

There are indications that a number of American temple presidents were aware that Sulochan wanted to execute mortal force against what remained of the original eleven zonals. In turn, some of those gurus wanted the same fate for Sulochan. In ENE, Rāmeśvara is quoted as follows:

“Sulochan should be given a new body.” 11

An accomplished female disciple of Rāmeśvara, who worked at the ISKCON Public Relations Dept. under Mukunda (in Los Angeles), had, somehow or other, negotiated a friendly relationship with Sulochan whenever he was in the area. She is quoted in ENE as follows:

“As far as I know, Sulochan wanted to kill all of the gurus.” 12

Ravīndra was of the opinion, not without evidence, that Sulochan had shifted his focus of violence to Rāmeśvara from Kīrtanānanda, who was heavily guarded at his Moundville compound. ENE quotes Professor Blueblood as follows:

“He wanted to assassinate Kīrtanānanda but decided it was too hard, and instead said he was going to try and assassinate Rāmeśvara, so there were Rāmeśvara security agents kind of following this guy around. He was in disguise going from place to place, and then some people came from New Vrindaban to help them. One of them was a guy by the name of Tīrtha, who had been trained as a killer by the United States government in Vietnam, so he had valuable skills.” 13

Drescher creeped up on Sulochan’s van undetected and fired two bullets into his head at point blank range. Later, he would comment that brain material slowly oozed out from the holes made by the bullets similar to what was depicted in “The Deer Hunter.” It is certain that Sulochan died instantly and possibly became a ghost, as sudden and violent death often results in the astral body remaining on Earth. No conditioned soul can know for sure about that, but it is certain that Sulochan let his guard down . . . and that carelessness cost him his life.

Let us summarize Chapter Twelve as follows: There were key entities (read, sub-movements) and personalities which or who dominated “ISKCON” throughout 1986. The question is: Was there one person who was integral to, or implicated in, all of them? There was all that centered around Bhāvānanda, and we have covered much of that. Was there a prominent personality who worked to not only expose him but to make him the centerpiece of discontent?

There was the Guru Reform Movement. Did one person not only dominate it but, by his position papers, more or less inaugurate it? There was the North American Temple Presidents Association (NATPA). Was there one president who was most prominent in it?

There was the vitiated G.B.C.. It added a new member the previous year, who then was privy to what was going on in its contentious meetings. Who was that special individual? Did he also qualify in the other categories just mentioned?

The G.B.C. made a substantial number of new initiating gurus in the Spring of 1986. Was there one of them who got preliminary approval to be an “ISKCON” dīkṣā-guru the year before and then got fully rubber stamped as guru by the Commish in 1986?

Taking into account all of these lateral octaves operative in “ISKCON” in that fateful year, is there one man—and one man only—who was integrally involved in every single one of them?

The answer is in the affirmative, and you all know that answer. That fellow was THE MAN in “ISKCON” in 1986. He was at the top of the institution’s turtle tank. His name and title is Professor William Deadwyler III, a.k.a., Ravīndra Svarupa das adhikārī.

Over and above all of these inclusions, this man accomplished something else. You could argue that he did so the following year in 1987, but, to a very significant extent, he actually accomplished its leading edge, without question, in 1986. He changed “ISKCON.” Kali-yuga required a change, and Professor Blueblood was Kali’s agent in order to accomplish it. Ravīndra was the inspiration, the seed, and the director of the collegiate compromise, The Second Transformation.

The details of how this came about will be discussed in next month’s presentation by your host speaker, which will center on 1987. Yet, it behooves me now to mention that The Second Transformation was a complete disaster in terms of any hope of Prabhupāda’s international movement returning to square one.

There was a chance for this in 1986. That chance was snuffed out by Professor Blueblood. He wanted a kinder, gentler “ISKCON” free from zonal tyrants. He accomplished that with his collegiate compromise, but he did so by ignoring this obvious truth: A bogus guru cannot transmit a genuine Vaisnava initiation.

We shall cover all of it threadbare next month. Compromise Reform was the winner in 1986, and that fact did not change the next year. Compromise Reform was Ravīndra’s baby, and he took full responsibility for it.

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. “ . . . if there is lack of knowledge, or if there is forgetfulness, everything will be spoiled in time.”14 It didn’t take much time for ISKCON to be converted into “ISKCON.” It has been a semblance of a spiritual institution for decades. A movement where victory in the turtle tank and political competition to fulfill personal ambition replaces advancement through the perfect knowledge is what “ISKCON” is now. SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors: p. 261, Kindle Edition;

2. Ibid, p. 262;

3. Ibid, p. 263;

4. Ibid, p. 264;

5. Ibid, p. 266;

6. Due to its penchant for secrecy, none of us knew that Trivikram had not technically been appointed a dīkṣā-guru. We all thought that he was, but as a practical matter, it did not mean much that he was put on a one-year waiting list. He and Atreya were thick as thieves, and they acted in tandem. As such, we considered both of them to be dīkṣā-gurus in 1986, and they did or said nothing to disabuse us of that notion, although only Atreya actually received that guru appointment that year;

7. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, p. 267, Kindle Edition;

8. Ibid, p. 269;

9. Ibid, pp. 269-70;

10. Ibid, p. 270. Indirectly, this quote alludes to the violence that Michael Shockman severely hurt Kīrtanānanda with in late 1985 via a rebar from a construction site at the Moundsville compound;

11. Ibid, p. 271;

12. Ibid, p. 271 (Nandini);

13. Ibid, p. 271;

14. Letter to Hansadutta, 6-22-72.


Podcast transcription (June 1, 2025): On and For the Record
(A Multi-Part Review of Doktorski’s Eleven Naked Emperors)
Analysis of Chapter Thirteen by Kailāsa Candra dāsa

To listen to Kailāsa Candra dāsa recite his review and commentary on Chapter Thirteen of Eleven Naked Emperors, go to: YouTube.

HARIḤ OṀ NAMAḤ

The root issues of why and how Prabhupāda’s branch of the Hare Kṛṣṇa movement was converted into an abhāsa-dharma is analyzed every month in our presentations. This month, we shall shed more light upon that make-show. Today’s analysis centers on dogma, pretension, and the avidyā feeding that dogma and pretension. It is a procedural avidyā before it becomes cult dogma. Once the dogma is believed, it continues to exacerbate a major institutional delusion in “ISKCON.” Since the mid-Eighties, this delusion is at the core of maintaining the cult’s pretense of offering genuine gurus and genuine initiations.

People who are still under the spell of the “ISKCON” version of mahā-māyā mistake dogma for truth, and their progress in spiritual life is thus bollixed. Some of them push all their chips to the center of the table. Doing so, they identify with the deviated cult out of fanaticism.

Once an unfortunate seeker of the Absolute Truth gets sucked into the cult’s vortex, there is little chance of escape. There is dogma in “ISKCON” which serves as the mortar to hold its wonder wall together. It works to keep each of its countless so-called initiated disciples in illusion, adrift without a spiritual rudder. Although there are exceptions, for the most part, that dogma covers over the fringies, also.

The “ISKCON” narrative of what went down since Prabhupāda’s disappearance is deeply flawed. Yet, its dedicated followers, all with a poor fund of knowledge and meager discriminatory power, are unable to realize this fact. The dogma, buttressed by unsound sentiments, was promulgated aggressively during the heady zonal ācārya era. Because that particular broken arrow—which we rightly term The First Transformation—derailed the bhakti train from the tracks (at very high speed), it soon enough led to an intense internecine war within the organization.

We have been discussing that contentiousness in our recent presentations, and we shall continue to do so this month. Rationalizing dogma becomes easy as long as even a couple of major misconceptions are believed to be true by everyone in an occult institution. “ISKCON” is just such an institution under just such a universal spell. Undeniably, massive, mind-boggling pretension was at the heart of the zonal ācārya era.

Yet, “ISKCON” is warping the actual historical narrative when it promulgates the belief that pretension disappeared after the temple presidents, via the Guru Reform Movement led by Ravīndra Svarūpa, finally got over in 1987. He and his comrades spread the illusion that they had overcome pretension after the eleven great pretenders, along with some later additions, were all busted down.

In the course of the zonal pretense, all of Ocean’s Eleven had taken constant exalted worship as so-called mahā-bhāgavats. It was utterly undeserved. The T. P.s [Temple Presidents], finally triumphed, believing that they were justified to then carry on the organization via a new dispensation, unimpeded by all those who had previously imitated Prabhupāda. However, although mostly unrecognized, pretension remained in their new paradigm.

What it did was morph into an imitation which was and is different at the outer circles, but not at the core. As the outrageous zonal era segued into the contentious mid-Eighties, some “ISKCON” leaders, and even some rank-and-file devotees, began to think that the godmen— supposedly appointed by Prabhupāda as dīkṣā-gurus and worshiped as uttama-adhikārīs on lavish seats in front of open, Deities in temple rooms— did not deserve the hype and adulation.

The developing internecine war was then in its incipient stage, and those who would become its stalwarts on the reform side of the coin (Ravīndra, in particular) could not fail to see signs that the leaders at the top echelon, the high-flying gurus, were not expert in spiritual science. How could they be? If they were, then that schism with Gouḍīya Mutt would not have, and could not have, transpired.

Remember: “ISKCON” relied heavily on Gouḍīya Mutt—one of its prominent leaders, in particular—for what was implemented in the zonal imposition during its incipient stage. By 1984, that scheme was floundering. Actual experts in the knowledge of cause and effect, what to speak of spiritual science, could not have drafted anything for the movement that would so soon wind up in such dire straits.

Real transcendental experts, on the other hand, produce successful results according to a plan which is in accordance with Providence. What was the result of the zonal era? It would not have collapsed if it had produced excellent or even good results in spreading pure Kṛṣṇa consciousness, if it was actually guided by very perfect men. It didn’t, and it wasn’t, and it cratered under the weight of its own contradictions.

Spiritual master in “ISKCON” was, and still is, determined by the vitiated G.B.C. As such, all of the gurus (post-Prabhupāda) are institutional gurus; this includes the eleven great pretenders who kicked off the massive show bottle. In the late Seventies and the first half of the Eighties, they were expert only in playing the governing body and climbing the latticework of its bureaucracy. They were trained and ruthless cult manipulators, granted, but more than this was needed in order to prevail during the fierce internecine war that they seeded.

In our ongoing review of Eleven Naked Emperors by Henry Doktorski (henceforward ENE), we have now reached Chapter Thirteen. Mostly, it centers around the fateful year of 1987. Last month, we covered 1986, the full emergence of the war. The appropriate title of ENE Chapter Thirteen this month is: “Fall of the Zonal Ācāryas.”

It details how Compromise Reform got over and successfully busted down the so-called uttama-adhikārīs to the alleged status of madhyam-adhikaris. The great pretenders who did not manifest egregious falldowns during this new “ISKCON” transformation (and who cooperated with Compromise Reform) were now supposed to be seen as madhyam-adhikārīs, but they were nowhere near that level.

Directly related to this will be “ISKCON” dogma manifested in the form of a major misconception (avidyā) about the spiritual science of bhakti-yoga. Just as importantly, like the zonal imposition, it was also a pretension. “ISKCON” since 1987 has been dependent upon its loyalists fully buying into this particular avidyā. It is the not-so-hidden linchpin of what afforded The Second Transformation to gain needed traction in order to last as long as it did, which was not very long.

In 1987, T.K.G. removed his Vyāsāsanas from all of the centers in his zones, indicating that he should only be shown the respect due a madhyama-adhikārīs. He gave up the pretense of being a God-realized mahā-bhāgavat, and it was an effective move. He knew which way the wind was blowing, and he acted accordingly. The chief scribe of the cult almost immediately followed his lead, having indicated even previous to it that he no longer wanted to be seen and worshiped as an uttama-adhikārī.

In the same time frame, ENE reveals that Harikeśa, delegating his power and autocratic style to his own men, transitioned four new gurus in his zone from sannyāsīs and a brahmacārī. This was an unprecedented move, part and parcel of the reactions which were breaking bad for the zonals who did want to be ostracized after being busted down. The gurus who were most shrewd made those adjustments, setting the stage for Compromise Reform to prevail in the Spring of 1987.

In the Sixties, politically inclined hippies, rejecting the host culture in America, often turned to Marxism as their positive alternative; they were located in urban centers, particularly in New York City. They concluded amongst themselves that the struggle against Capitalism was not how the final battle against the most potent enemy would ensue. As such, their infighting was fierce, because they all believed that the final fight would be between Socialism and Communism.

Similarly, the writing was on the wall in early 1987: The battle with the high-flying gurus was not the essence of this “ISKCON” internecine war. The battle against Status Quo and Status Quo Modified still had to be fought to its destined end, but it was clear how it would play out and which party would win. Reform would triumph, and that became more and more evident by the day. Instead, the essential battle was, in 1987, between Compromise Reform and Radical Reform.

ENE describes this as follows:

“The Radical Reformers argued that ISKCON should return to ‘Square-One,’ to the time before the zonal acharyas took office after Bhaktivedānta Swāmi Prabhupāda’s disappearance. They advocated making all previous initiations by the zonal ācāryas null and void. They said that all the thousands of disciples of the new gurus should be notified that their initiations had been conducted under false pretenses; that they had actually not received initiation into the sampradāya.

The Radical Reformers also insisted that the zonal acharyas who had taken over the G.B.C. in 1978 and who were still in office—Jayapataka, Bhavananda, Hridayananda, Satsvarupa, Harikesh, Tamal Krishna, Ramesvara, Bhagavan and Kirtanananda—should be stripped of their guru-ship and disciplined. For nearly a decade, the reformers claimed, these pretenders, with the authorization of the G.B.C., had instituted their own totalitarian regime and persecuted the actual brahmins in ISKCON, such as Pradyumna, Yasodanandan, Kailasa-Chandra and others, who had so bravely tried to confront the charlatans and keep Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda’s movement on track.” 1

In the same time frame, one of three gurus initially expanded from Ocean’s Eleven–when it shared the franchise for the first time in 1982–chastised the vitiated G.B.C.. ENE offers a part of his critique as follows:

“An ISKCON guru and G.B.C. member, Panchadravida Swami—who had been ordained as a guru in 1982—advocated removing every single G.B.C. member and electing entirely new members. All the leaders, including himself, he claimed, had a hand in corruption. Panchadravida Swami explained: ‘I want to apologize to the devotees for what I consider was a great injustice perpetrated over the last nine years. As a G.B.C. and guru I can’t absolve myself of responsibility for many of the injustices that devotees have experienced. . . for the last nine years, ISKCON underwent a shift from being a very scientific and scripturally presented movement to a personality cult. . . We established elaborate worship of ordinary persons. We’ve worshiped people who are more astute politically than spiritually. By establishing that kind of worship for persons who aren’t pure, we diminish Prabhupāda’s position.’” 2

The wheels were coming off, but the vitiated G.B.C. would not be converted to reform without a fight. Their corruption was being exposed by insiders, but point man had to be punished. It expelled Païcadravida from “ISKCON” in the Spring of 1987. As a result, he soon joined the fledgling Neo-Mutt adversary.

As noted previously, the insurgents in “ISKCON” became commonly known as the Guru Reform Movement. Ironically, this anomalous title would be modified and adapted less than a decade later by one of the Rittvik groups. The Guru Reform Movement of late 1986 wanted to establish a committee in order to check the power of the vitiated G.B.C.. Astonishingly, they were able to do just that in the last month of 1986, and it had quite the bite during the fateful next year. As per ENE:

“Finally, after nearly three years of struggle, the guru reformers constituted a formidable force against the guru-controlled G.B.C.. A fifty-man committee consisting of temple presidents, sannyāsīs and other senior Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda disciples who opposed the zonal acharyas, was formed at the December 1986 North American G.B.C. meeting in Dallas, Texas. Tamal Krishna Goswami was elected chairman. Besides being ambitious and determined, Tamal Krishna was a superb administrator and political strategist. He saw the fall of the zonal acharyas coming, and in an effort to retain as much power as possible, he jumped ship to join the side he thought would win: the guru reformers.” 3

Remember: The temple presidents had the gurus by the short hairs. The gurus were big-time enjoyers. They exploited more psycho-physical pleasure than anyone else in the world, because they received so much adulation not afforded to anyone else, anywhere. They obviously needed to keep their disciples in the “ISKCON” institutional system, if for no other reason than to be able to secure a portion of the pick their men and women brought in daily.

It was up to the temple presidents to train (this word is used in a loose sense here, obviously) thousands of new people, keeping them loyal to “ISKCON.” Such loyalty necessarily entailed adherence to their gurus, supposedly on the highest level of purity and realization. ENE describes more about the Guru Reform Movement and its fifty-man committee in the showdown at Māyāpur, 1987:

“The fifty-man committee dominated the agenda at the 1987 G.B.C. meetings in Māyāpur. The committee discussed a suggestion that the entire G.B.C. resign and new members be elected, but it was rejected “due to the consideration that Srila Prabhupāda’s mood was more to reform someone than to throw him out.” However, the fifty-man committee succeeded in suspending the G.B.C., an amazing feat . . .” 4

From what I heard through the grapevine, the committee targeted the most powerful of the gurus, the right tactic in order for their strategy (to overthrow the zonals) to succeed. Although it is not mentioned in ENE, your host speaker heard that they jettisoned Hṛdayānanda first, and he was very resentful about it when later re-instated.

However, the committee had its momentum checked when it came to attacking Harikeśa, because he was very influential and wealthy. He threatened to start his own movement. It appeared that he could pull central and eastern Europe completely out of the “ISKCON” sphere, so the committee had to back off when it came to him.

Nevertheless, please note that the Guru Reform Movement being able to suspend the G.B.C.—no matter for how short the length of time it was—is mind-boggling. Prabhupāda did this in the first half of April, 1972, and fifteen years later it was done again. These suspensions proved (and still prove) that the G.B.C. was never endowed with absolute power. If it was, it could never have been suspended or checked in that way.

The G.B.C. was supposed to be the ultimate managing authority in the movement, but it only held that status for as long as it remained bona fide. By 1987, it had been severely deviated for at least nine years. It was never the ultimate spiritual authority, although it appeared to be so by its actions of appointing . . . or not vetoing . . . or voting in spiritual masters through ever-changing, ecclesiastical devices (read, concoctions).

Chapter Thirteen devotes substantial font space to the North American temple presidents and their meeting in Towaco, New Jersey just prior to Māyāpur, 1987. There is almost no record of it, because they wanted it that way. Their penchant for secrecy had been assimilated by them from their leaders at the top echelon. However, some information about that Jersey mini-conclave did eventually surface.

We are simply going to summarize it. It marked the final battle between Compromise Reform and Radical Reform. One of the chief leaders of the latter group did not attend, and that contributed in a major way to the outcome. Ravīndra and his comrades (the Bolsheviks) prevailed against the Mensheviks. Not only did they prevail by their numbers, but the most powerful scholar was on their side.

In Chapter 13, what went down in this smaller battle within the bigger battle was analyzed by a former disciple of Hansadutta as follows:

“According to the compromise, . . . the remaining ‘zonals’ would keep the ‘disciples’ they had acquired under the blatant lie that they had been appointed by Srila Prabhupāda, and a number of guru ‘reform’ movement leaders like Ravīndra Svarupa dasa and Atreya Rishi dasa would abandon any appearance of principle by also joining the make-show as an ecclesiastical ‘guru.’ This Machiavellian pragmatism is unfortunately how things often get done in the G.B.C.. It isn’t . . . trying to do what is pure or even according to Srila Prabhupāda. Although his instructions are selectively invoked, when the going gets tough, it is too often what is going to keep the powerful in power and keep the mass of devotees bewildered about how the G.B.C. really does things so that they will keep producing the results of new members and money.

In this way, the blatant abuses and deviations of the zonal acharyas were only replaced by a lesser evil. The remaining ‘zonals’ who had the real power of many so-called ‘disciples’ and temples were forced to come down a notch or two and largely surrender the movement’s management . . . Then the new bosses painted a new face on the fading patient by ostracizing the more strident reformers, quieting the more dependent with assurances of ‘righting the wrongs,’ and ushering in a less autocratic, collegial, far more Western and warm and fuzzy ‘ISKCON.’” 5

All of this was courtesy Professor Blueblood. It is virtually certain that he had been in consultation with some of the “ISKCON” leaders still backing the original gurus. By Towaco, at least two of them (mentioned already) had signaled a willingness to accept a compromise. Ravīndra proposed compromise with arguments against rejecting post-Prabhupāda initiations. He warned that the schism it would cause was not worth the solution it would produce, and the majority bought into that argument.

Radical reform lost at Towaco. As such, the new Guru Reform Movement came into Māyāpur, 1987 with a strong and united momentum. They came in free from the radicals formerly in their group, because the few who still believed in Radical Reform no longer had a runway.

The torch was passed to a new transformation. Four prominent sannyāsīs–embroiled in scandals and all initiating gurus and influential members of the vitiated G.B.C.–either resigned or were removed from office. Damage control was still in vogue at the 1987 Māyāpur conclave, which would pass many resolutions. The Second Transformation of “ISKCON” was now the wave of the future, but for how long would its collegiate compromise last? And what was it really based upon?

What may surprise some of you is that, at root, it was based upon the same things The First Transformation of the zonals was based upon: It was based upon both institutionalism (in an even stronger way than during the zonal era), and it was still based upon pretension. The pretension of cutting obnoxious mahā-bhāgavat profiles employed by the zonals was eradicated. However, it was REPLACED by another pretension.

TATTVAMASI

It was based upon the idea that the zonals institutionally being busted down to madhyam-adhikārī actually qualified them as being madhyams. In point of fact, they had no such qualification. It was based upon the pretension that all of those initiating gurus added to the cult in the Eighties were madhyams. None of those pretenders were madhyams. It has always been a pretension that they were. None of them were anywhere near being genuine madhyam-adhikaris.

Since the mid-Eighties, it has been integral to “ISKCON” dogma that its gurus are madhyams. There is no substance to that whatsoever. Since then, they have all been pretender madhyam-adhikaris. A madhyam-adhikari initiated by Prabhupāda can become a dīkṣā-guru only if he receives Prabhupāda’s order to initiate new disciples. A madhyam-adhikārī is an advanced transcendentalist. We shall discuss this in detail later in our presentation. A madhyam guru is never an institutional guru.

Here are some of the resolutions passed at 1987 māyāpur:

    1. Kīrtanānanda Swāmi was expelled and henceforward forbidden to participate in any ISKCON functions;

    2. Bhāvānanda had his status as dīkṣā-guru suspended (again);

    3. Bhagavān and Rāmeśvara (each no longer recognized as a swami but as “dasa” in the resolution) were suspended as ISKCON gurus;

    4. Only Prabhupāda’s Vyāsāsan was allowed in any ISKCON temple;

    5. The only guru-pūja allowed would be for Prabhupāda;

    6. ISKCON gurus could not be worshiped by their disciples in the temples;

    7. Honorific titles for gurus could not be used in public forums;

    8. The term “Ācārya” could not any longer be used for ISKCON gurus;

    9. Only Prabhupāda’s name would be chanted in temple kīrtans. 6

Your host speaker is quoted as follows in Chapter 13:

“On the other hand, the radical reformers were saddened by what they saw as the victory of ecclesiasticism and the defeat of philosophy. Kailasa-Chandra noted, ‘Sahajiyas cannot be allowed to keep their so-called initiated disciples if they superficially clean up their act. Pretender mahā-bhāgavats cannot retroactively be accorded the status of advanced devotees—and know it for a fact that any Vaishnava madhyama-adhikārī is an advanced devotee—simply because they jack down the opulence of their worship and say that their godbrothers and godsisters are no longer obliged to also serve and love them as gurus.’” 7

ENE quotes Yaśodānandan prabhu, an important initiated disciple of Prabhupāda (and formerly an influential sannyāsī), as follows:

“The current G.B.C. still maintains as members some of the ‘unrepentant architects’ of the zonal-acharya system. . . . And yet we are being told that a reform took place in 1986-1987 and that everything is back to normal. I question whether or not this was a merely cosmetic reform, while some of the masterminds and ‘unrepentant architects’ merely toned down their style, even though their ‘acharya ambitions’ had been clearly unmasked. Is the G.B.C. of our movement really serious about re-establishing the much-needed integrity of its board? Or are we to sadly conclude that it is simply the same ‘old boys’ network’ with a different gloss?” 8

ENE quotes Nityānanda prabhu, a powerful disciple of Prabhupāda, who single-handedly opened the New Orleans yatra in the Sixties, as follows:

“’Many senior devotees are not at all satisfied with the meager repentances that followed after the fall of the absolute gurus in 1987. From what I have seen, only Satsvarupa Maharaja genuinely regrets his involvement with the G.B.C.-Guru Era of 1978-1987. . . . As far as I know . . . there was little to no public repentance for what a few powerful G.B.C.-Gurus did to nearly destroy Srila Prabhupāda’s movement. Some of them are now gone, and some are still here.” 9

Actually, there has been a complete turnover in the G.B.C. since 1987. As far as functioning gurus from that time are concerned, there are only a handful left. Time changes things.

The ISKCON Shastric Advisory Council is quoted to have warned:

“We should also be aware from the history of other sampradāyas and religions of the real danger of gradual corruption. Even if apparent purity were maintained for some time by a bureaucratic regulating system of authorization, the eternal temptations of misusing the status of guru for self-aggrandizement could ruin the system and the institution. In future generations we, like other sampradāyas, could become burdened with gurus who collect disciples mainly for money and power. Such corruption could occur even while maintaining the external appearance of bureaucratic purity.” 10

ENE, in Chapter 13 at its very conclusion, shares the following analysis by Dhaneśvara Swāmi, a genuinely initiated disciple of Prabhupāda and today an influential preacher:

“’As the highest authority of ISKCON, Srila Prabhupāda was final arbiter (decision maker). His decisions on all matters were the final word. In Srila Prabhupāda’s Last Will and Testament, he wrote that the G.B.C. would be the Ultimate Managing Authority for the entire Society, just as Srila Prabhupāda was during his manifest presence. There is nothing wrong with that. However, again this title (form) has been misinterpreted by the G.B.C., mistaking this phrase to mean that they are both the ‘Ultimate Managers,’ and the ‘Ultimate Authority.’

Thus they think they can do with ISKCON as they see fit (creating substance), while disregarding Srila Prabhupāda’s earlier statements of what ISKCON is meant to be—forgetting that their authority stems from him even to this day. They interpret their title to mean they are equal to Srila Prabhupāda himself, even stating that whatever they say is as if Srila Prabhupāda himself had said it. And beyond that, through this idea of being the ‘ultimate authority’ they attempt to create siddhanta (spiritual principles), contradicting long-established Gaudiya Siddhanta.

Thus many of their ‘laws’ are simply dogma. The most glaring example of this is their idea that all gurus connected with ISKCON must be subordinate to their control, ignoring the fact that the bona fide guru must be a transcendental autocrat. . . . The G.B.C. have failed in every respect to carry out Srila Prabhupāda’s instructions to themselves and for his mission. They have taken charge of Srila Prabhupāda’s ISKCON as if it were their own to do with what they please, rather than acting as fiduciaries carefully protecting what Srila Prabhupāda had entrusted to them, and are in fact acting in opposition to Srila Prabhupāda’s direct instructions.” 11

Dhaneśvara brought up dogma in his analysis. Dogma was also mentioned at the beginning of this month’s presentation. We are, of course, only referring to “ISKCON” dogma. Along with it, continuing pretension was also mentioned earlier. The dogma that replaced the pretension of The First Transformation, of the massive deviation of the zonal ācāryas (and all of the hell it brought to everyone), relied upon, and continues to rely upon, the following procedural avidyā:

THE DUMBING DOWN OF MADHYAMA-ADHIKARI.

We find the description of a madhyam-adhikārī in TLK:

    taj joṣaṇād āśv apavarga-vartmani
    śraddhā ratir bhaktir anukramiñyati

    Cultivating that transcendental knowledge, one quickly advances on the path of liberation. Firm faith, attraction, and devotion will follow in order. (Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 3.25.25, verse 12)

    “One who has firm faith in the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes fixed” (Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 3.25.25, purport)

Also in TLK, we find the following commentary:

“The madhyama-adhikārī. . . wants to see that not a moment is wasted without engagement in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. He is always careful not to spoil life’s valuable time. That is the first qualification of a madhyama-adhikārī.” 13

The komala-śraddhā of the neophyte is not being described here. What is being described is prauddha-śraddhā, firm faith. This is the beginning of madhyama-adhikārī. The madhyam is an advanced guru. He is automatically a śikṣā-guru and a vartma-pradarśaka-guru as soon as he reaches this advanced stage of madhyam, which entails real śraddhā. Firm faith means fixed faith. It means being fixed in buddhi-yoga.

An advanced transcendentalist in the bhakti line has this fixation at the very beginning of madhyam; he progresses from there. You can pick up that he is advanced and perfectly self-controlled by his vibration. He is a special man. The guru must be a very perfect man. The madhyama-adhikārī is a very perfect man.

The uttama is more advanced, but the madhyam can never be compared to the neophyte, who is not qualified to be guru and is not a perfect man. The real path to perfection, as evidenced in the verse quoted above, begins at real śraddhā, which is firm faith.

The institutional guru is never fixed. Institutional guru means bogus guru. Organized religion, when it enters into the outer level of bhakti (and that level is not bona fide), produces fake madhyams. It produces fake gurus who are all institutional gurus. That is all that you get in “ISKCON,” and such has been the case since the mid-Eighties.

Previous to that, you only got fake uttamas, which was more outrageous. That pretense broke down badly in about eight years. Yet, as mentioned previously, the pretense simply transferred itself to fake madhyams, appointed or not vetoed or forced to wait in queue to be approved to be institutional gurus by the vitiated G.B.C..

Always remember that the vitiated G.B.C. has its fingerprints all over the transformations which surfaced out of the ocean of nescience and became intrinsic to the “ISKCON” movement. Ocean’s Eleven were all governing body commissioners. The zonal imposition was overturned by the vitiated G.B.C., after having first authorized it. The collegiate compromise was engineered by the vitiated G.B.C., also. Professor Blueblood was appointed to the vitiated G.B.C. in 1987. And wouldn’t you know, the very next year, Ravīndra Svarupa was elected chairman of the Governing Body.

Since the manifestation of The Second Transformation, the dumbing down of madhyam has become procedural avidyā in the cult. It manifests as “ISKCON” dogma in the form of the belief that “ISKCON” must always have gurus. In point of fact, it has never had any gurus. Its so-called initiated disciples are all cheated, all improperly initiated. The so-called madhyams of “ISKCON” are now the cult’s primary cheaters.

“. . . we have created these G.B.C.. So, they should be very responsible men. Otherwise, they will be punished. They will be punished to become a śūdra. Although Yamarāja is a G.B.C., but he made a little mistake. He was punished to become a śūdra. So those who are G.B.C.’s, they should be very, very careful to administer the business of ISKCON. Otherwise they will be punished.” 14

Genuine gurus are never punished, but bogus gurus are. A genuine madhyama-adhikārī, if he is ordered by Prabhupāda to initiate disciples, will not cheat them. As such, they will not develop resentment against him, recognizing that he is an advanced man who, unless he becomes fully God-realized, can provide only insufficient guidance.

In the absence of any genuine madhyama-adhikārīs in the Western world, the recourse, the āśrama, is the book bhāgavat:

“There are two types of bhāgavatas, namely the book bhāgavata and the devotee bhāgavata. Both the bhāgavatas are competent remedies, and both of them or either of them can be good enough to eliminate the obstacles. . . bhāgavata book and person are identical.” 15

The Ācārya in the true sense of the term is the real Transcendental Autocrat. The disciple of that Transcendental Autocrat follows in his footsteps. From that perspective and in that sense, his direction is as good as the Ācārya’s. The madhyam is an ācārya as a regular guru:

“When I order, ‘You become guru,’ he becomes regular guru. That’s all. He becomes disciple of my disciple. That’s it.” 16

Prabhupāda wanted all of his men to become regular gurus. He expected this from his leaders, in particular. When the pronoun “he” is used for the first time in this concise quote (above), it refers to Prabhupāda’s initiated disciple being a regular guru. When that pronoun is used for the second time, it refers to the newcomer who that regular guru initiates. Prabhupāda wanted regular gurus. They are, by quality and definition, all madhyama-adhikārīs . . . and they are all very perfect men.

They are like monitors in class, teaching assistants working under The Professor, The Ācārya, to guide newcomers up the ladder of devotional service through perfect spiritual science. The man who has attained niṣṭhā in buddhi-yoga can certainly guide his initiated disciple to his same advanced stage of mind control.

Stop dumbing down madhyam-adhikārī!

The colossal hoax known as the fabricated, so-called “ISKCON” confederation is a pseudo-spiritual scam. It is loaded with dogma. It is loaded with avidyā. Its gurus are all still sahajiyās, just not as blatant in their actions as were the previous pretenders. Pretension has not at all been extricated from “ISKCON.” SAD EVA SAUMYA

ENDNOTES

1. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, pp. 276-277, Kindle Edition;

2. Ibid, p. 277;

3. Ibid, p. 278;

4. Ibid, p. 279;

5. Ibid, pp. 284-85 (Bhakta Eric Johanson);

6. Only a handful of the resolutions are listed here. The numbers assigned to each resolution listed in this article (nine) are not the numbers assigned to any of those specific resolutions by its documentation at Māyāpur, 1987;

7. Doktorski, Henry. Eleven Naked Emperors, pp. 290-91, Kindle Edition;

8. Ibid, p. 291;

9. Ibid, p. 292;

10. Ibid, pp. 294-95;

11. Ibid, p. 297. Please note: Your host speaker has broken down this long quotation into three paragraphs for easier assimilation. The original transmission was in one continuous flow, without any paragraphs;

12. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam 3.25.25, verse translated by your host speaker;

13.Teachings of Lord Kapila, Chapter 15, “Meditation on the Lord’s Transcendental Form”;

14. Platform lecture on Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, June 4, 1974 in Geneva;

15. Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, 1.2.18, purport;

16. Room conversation in Prabhupāda’s quarters with the Governing Body Commission at the Krishna Balaram temple, May 28, 1977.

(to be continued)


Back to: Eleven Naked Emperors Homepage